1\input texinfo
2@setfilename ld.info
3@c Copyright 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000,
4@c 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009
5@c Free Software Foundation, Inc.
6@syncodeindex ky cp
7@c man begin INCLUDE
8@include configdoc.texi
9@c (configdoc.texi is generated by the Makefile)
10@include bfdver.texi
11@c man end
12
13@c @smallbook
14
15@macro gcctabopt{body}
16@code{\body\}
17@end macro
18
19@c man begin NAME
20@ifset man
21@c Configure for the generation of man pages
22@set UsesEnvVars
23@set GENERIC
24@set ARM
25@set H8300
26@set HPPA
27@set I960
28@set M68HC11
29@set M68K
30@set MMIX
31@set MSP430
32@set POWERPC
33@set POWERPC64
34@set Renesas
35@set SPU
36@set TICOFF
37@set WIN32
38@set XTENSA
39@end ifset
40@c man end
41
42@ifnottex
43@dircategory Software development
44@direntry
45* Ld: (ld).                       The GNU linker.
46@end direntry
47@end ifnottex
48
49@copying
50This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker LD
51@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
52@value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
53@end ifset
54version @value{VERSION}.
55
56Copyright @copyright{} 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000,
572001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
58
59Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
60under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
61or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
62with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
63Back-Cover Texts.  A copy of the license is included in the
64section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
65@end copying
66@iftex
67@finalout
68@setchapternewpage odd
69@settitle The GNU linker
70@titlepage
71@title The GNU linker
72@sp 1
73@subtitle @code{ld}
74@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
75@subtitle @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
76@end ifset
77@subtitle Version @value{VERSION}
78@author Steve Chamberlain
79@author Ian Lance Taylor
80@page
81
82@tex
83{\parskip=0pt
84\hfill Red Hat Inc\par
85\hfill nickc\@credhat.com, doc\@redhat.com\par
86\hfill {\it The GNU linker}\par
87\hfill Edited by Jeffrey Osier (jeffrey\@cygnus.com)\par
88}
89\global\parindent=0pt % Steve likes it this way.
90@end tex
91
92@vskip 0pt plus 1filll
93@c man begin COPYRIGHT
94Copyright @copyright{} 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996, 1997, 1998,
951999, 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009 Free
96Software Foundation, Inc.
97
98Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
99under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
100or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
101with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
102Back-Cover Texts.  A copy of the license is included in the
103section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
104@c man end
105
106@end titlepage
107@end iftex
108@contents
109@c FIXME: Talk about importance of *order* of args, cmds to linker!
110
111@ifnottex
112@node Top
113@top LD
114This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker ld
115@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
116@value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
117@end ifset
118version @value{VERSION}.
119
120This document is distributed under the terms of the GNU Free
121Documentation License version 1.3.  A copy of the license is included
122in the section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
123
124@menu
125* Overview::                    Overview
126* Invocation::                  Invocation
127* Scripts::                     Linker Scripts
128@ifset GENERIC
129* Machine Dependent::           Machine Dependent Features
130@end ifset
131@ifclear GENERIC
132@ifset H8300
133* H8/300::                      ld and the H8/300
134@end ifset
135@ifset Renesas
136* Renesas::                     ld and other Renesas micros
137@end ifset
138@ifset I960
139* i960::                        ld and the Intel 960 family
140@end ifset
141@ifset ARM
142* ARM::				ld and the ARM family
143@end ifset
144@ifset HPPA
145* HPPA ELF32::                  ld and HPPA 32-bit ELF
146@end ifset
147@ifset M68HC11
148* M68HC11/68HC12::              ld and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
149@end ifset
150@ifset M68K
151* M68K::                        ld and Motorola 68K family
152@end ifset
153@ifset POWERPC
154* PowerPC ELF32::               ld and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
155@end ifset
156@ifset POWERPC64
157* PowerPC64 ELF64::             ld and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
158@end ifset
159@ifset SPU
160* SPU ELF::			ld and SPU ELF Support
161@end ifset
162@ifset TICOFF
163* TI COFF::                     ld and the TI COFF
164@end ifset
165@ifset WIN32
166* Win32::                       ld and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
167@end ifset
168@ifset XTENSA
169* Xtensa::                      ld and Xtensa Processors
170@end ifset
171@end ifclear
172@ifclear SingleFormat
173* BFD::                         BFD
174@end ifclear
175@c Following blank line required for remaining bug in makeinfo conds/menus
176
177* Reporting Bugs::              Reporting Bugs
178* MRI::                         MRI Compatible Script Files
179* GNU Free Documentation License::  GNU Free Documentation License
180* LD Index::                       LD Index
181@end menu
182@end ifnottex
183
184@node Overview
185@chapter Overview
186
187@cindex @sc{gnu} linker
188@cindex what is this?
189
190@ifset man
191@c man begin SYNOPSIS
192ld [@b{options}] @var{objfile} @dots{}
193@c man end
194
195@c man begin SEEALSO
196ar(1), nm(1), objcopy(1), objdump(1), readelf(1) and
197the Info entries for @file{binutils} and
198@file{ld}.
199@c man end
200@end ifset
201
202@c man begin DESCRIPTION
203
204@command{ld} combines a number of object and archive files, relocates
205their data and ties up symbol references. Usually the last step in
206compiling a program is to run @command{ld}.
207
208@command{ld} accepts Linker Command Language files written in
209a superset of AT&T's Link Editor Command Language syntax,
210to provide explicit and total control over the linking process.
211
212@ifset man
213@c For the man only
214This man page does not describe the command language; see the
215@command{ld} entry in @code{info} for full details on the command
216language and on other aspects of the GNU linker.
217@end ifset
218
219@ifclear SingleFormat
220This version of @command{ld} uses the general purpose BFD libraries
221to operate on object files. This allows @command{ld} to read, combine, and
222write object files in many different formats---for example, COFF or
223@code{a.out}.  Different formats may be linked together to produce any
224available kind of object file.  @xref{BFD}, for more information.
225@end ifclear
226
227Aside from its flexibility, the @sc{gnu} linker is more helpful than other
228linkers in providing diagnostic information.  Many linkers abandon
229execution immediately upon encountering an error; whenever possible,
230@command{ld} continues executing, allowing you to identify other errors
231(or, in some cases, to get an output file in spite of the error).
232
233@c man end
234
235@node Invocation
236@chapter Invocation
237
238@c man begin DESCRIPTION
239
240The @sc{gnu} linker @command{ld} is meant to cover a broad range of situations,
241and to be as compatible as possible with other linkers.  As a result,
242you have many choices to control its behavior.
243
244@c man end
245
246@ifset UsesEnvVars
247@menu
248* Options::                     Command Line Options
249* Environment::                 Environment Variables
250@end menu
251
252@node Options
253@section Command Line Options
254@end ifset
255
256@cindex command line
257@cindex options
258
259@c man begin OPTIONS
260
261The linker supports a plethora of command-line options, but in actual
262practice few of them are used in any particular context.
263@cindex standard Unix system
264For instance, a frequent use of @command{ld} is to link standard Unix
265object files on a standard, supported Unix system.  On such a system, to
266link a file @code{hello.o}:
267
268@smallexample
269ld -o @var{output} /lib/crt0.o hello.o -lc
270@end smallexample
271
272This tells @command{ld} to produce a file called @var{output} as the
273result of linking the file @code{/lib/crt0.o} with @code{hello.o} and
274the library @code{libc.a}, which will come from the standard search
275directories.  (See the discussion of the @samp{-l} option below.)
276
277Some of the command-line options to @command{ld} may be specified at any
278point in the command line.  However, options which refer to files, such
279as @samp{-l} or @samp{-T}, cause the file to be read at the point at
280which the option appears in the command line, relative to the object
281files and other file options.  Repeating non-file options with a
282different argument will either have no further effect, or override prior
283occurrences (those further to the left on the command line) of that
284option.  Options which may be meaningfully specified more than once are
285noted in the descriptions below.
286
287@cindex object files
288Non-option arguments are object files or archives which are to be linked
289together.  They may follow, precede, or be mixed in with command-line
290options, except that an object file argument may not be placed between
291an option and its argument.
292
293Usually the linker is invoked with at least one object file, but you can
294specify other forms of binary input files using @samp{-l}, @samp{-R},
295and the script command language.  If @emph{no} binary input files at all
296are specified, the linker does not produce any output, and issues the
297message @samp{No input files}.
298
299If the linker cannot recognize the format of an object file, it will
300assume that it is a linker script.  A script specified in this way
301augments the main linker script used for the link (either the default
302linker script or the one specified by using @samp{-T}).  This feature
303permits the linker to link against a file which appears to be an object
304or an archive, but actually merely defines some symbol values, or uses
305@code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} to load other objects.  Specifying a
306script in this way merely augments the main linker script, with the
307extra commands placed after the main script; use the @samp{-T} option
308to replace the default linker script entirely, but note the effect of
309the @code{INSERT} command.  @xref{Scripts}.
310
311For options whose names are a single letter,
312option arguments must either follow the option letter without intervening
313whitespace, or be given as separate arguments immediately following the
314option that requires them.
315
316For options whose names are multiple letters, either one dash or two can
317precede the option name; for example, @samp{-trace-symbol} and
318@samp{--trace-symbol} are equivalent.  Note---there is one exception to
319this rule.  Multiple letter options that start with a lower case 'o' can
320only be preceded by two dashes.  This is to reduce confusion with the
321@samp{-o} option.  So for example @samp{-omagic} sets the output file
322name to @samp{magic} whereas @samp{--omagic} sets the NMAGIC flag on the
323output.
324
325Arguments to multiple-letter options must either be separated from the
326option name by an equals sign, or be given as separate arguments
327immediately following the option that requires them.  For example,
328@samp{--trace-symbol foo} and @samp{--trace-symbol=foo} are equivalent.
329Unique abbreviations of the names of multiple-letter options are
330accepted.
331
332Note---if the linker is being invoked indirectly, via a compiler driver
333(e.g. @samp{gcc}) then all the linker command line options should be
334prefixed by @samp{-Wl,} (or whatever is appropriate for the particular
335compiler driver) like this:
336
337@smallexample
338  gcc -Wl,--start-group foo.o bar.o -Wl,--end-group
339@end smallexample
340
341This is important, because otherwise the compiler driver program may
342silently drop the linker options, resulting in a bad link.  Confusion
343may also arise when passing options that require values through a
344driver, as the use of a space between option and argument acts as
345a separator, and causes the driver to pass only the option to the linker
346and the argument to the compiler.  In this case, it is simplest to use
347the joined forms of both single- and multiple-letter options, such as:
348
349@smallexample
350  gcc foo.o bar.o -Wl,-eENTRY -Wl,-Map=a.map
351@end smallexample
352
353Here is a table of the generic command line switches accepted by the GNU
354linker:
355
356@table @gcctabopt
357@include at-file.texi
358
359@kindex -a @var{keyword}
360@item -a @var{keyword}
361This option is supported for HP/UX compatibility.  The @var{keyword}
362argument must be one of the strings @samp{archive}, @samp{shared}, or
363@samp{default}.  @samp{-aarchive} is functionally equivalent to
364@samp{-Bstatic}, and the other two keywords are functionally equivalent
365to @samp{-Bdynamic}.  This option may be used any number of times.
366
367@kindex --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
368@item --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
369Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_AUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
370@var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
371specified in the library.  If specified multiple times @code{DT_AUDIT}
372will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. If the linker
373finds an object with an audit entry while searching for shared libraries,
374it will add a corresponding @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry in the output file.  
375This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit
376interface.  
377
378@ifset I960
379@cindex architectures
380@kindex -A @var{arch}
381@item -A @var{architecture}
382@kindex --architecture=@var{arch}
383@itemx --architecture=@var{architecture}
384In the current release of @command{ld}, this option is useful only for the
385Intel 960 family of architectures.  In that @command{ld} configuration, the
386@var{architecture} argument identifies the particular architecture in
387the 960 family, enabling some safeguards and modifying the
388archive-library search path.  @xref{i960,,@command{ld} and the Intel 960
389family}, for details.
390
391Future releases of @command{ld} may support similar functionality for
392other architecture families.
393@end ifset
394
395@ifclear SingleFormat
396@cindex binary input format
397@kindex -b @var{format}
398@kindex --format=@var{format}
399@cindex input format
400@cindex input format
401@item -b @var{input-format}
402@itemx --format=@var{input-format}
403@command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
404file.  If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
405@samp{-b} option to specify the binary format for input object files
406that follow this option on the command line.  Even when @command{ld} is
407configured to support alternative object formats, you don't usually need
408to specify this, as @command{ld} should be configured to expect as a
409default input format the most usual format on each machine.
410@var{input-format} is a text string, the name of a particular format
411supported by the BFD libraries.  (You can list the available binary
412formats with @samp{objdump -i}.)
413@xref{BFD}.
414
415You may want to use this option if you are linking files with an unusual
416binary format.  You can also use @samp{-b} to switch formats explicitly (when
417linking object files of different formats), by including
418@samp{-b @var{input-format}} before each group of object files in a
419particular format.
420
421The default format is taken from the environment variable
422@code{GNUTARGET}.
423@ifset UsesEnvVars
424@xref{Environment}.
425@end ifset
426You can also define the input format from a script, using the command
427@code{TARGET};
428@ifclear man
429see @ref{Format Commands}.
430@end ifclear
431@end ifclear
432
433@kindex -c @var{MRI-cmdfile}
434@kindex --mri-script=@var{MRI-cmdfile}
435@cindex compatibility, MRI
436@item -c @var{MRI-commandfile}
437@itemx --mri-script=@var{MRI-commandfile}
438For compatibility with linkers produced by MRI, @command{ld} accepts script
439files written in an alternate, restricted command language, described in
440@ifclear man
441@ref{MRI,,MRI Compatible Script Files}.
442@end ifclear
443@ifset man
444the MRI Compatible Script Files section of GNU ld documentation.
445@end ifset
446Introduce MRI script files with
447the option @samp{-c}; use the @samp{-T} option to run linker
448scripts written in the general-purpose @command{ld} scripting language.
449If @var{MRI-cmdfile} does not exist, @command{ld} looks for it in the directories
450specified by any @samp{-L} options.
451
452@cindex common allocation
453@kindex -d
454@kindex -dc
455@kindex -dp
456@item -d
457@itemx -dc
458@itemx -dp
459These three options are equivalent; multiple forms are supported for
460compatibility with other linkers.  They assign space to common symbols
461even if a relocatable output file is specified (with @samp{-r}).  The
462script command @code{FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
463@xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
464
465@kindex --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
466@kindex -P @var{AUDITLIB}
467@item --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
468@itemx -P @var{AUDITLIB}
469Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
470@var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
471specified in the library.  If specified multiple times @code{DT_DEPAUDIT}
472will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use.  This
473option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit interface.
474The -P option is provided for Solaris compatibility.  
475
476@cindex entry point, from command line
477@kindex -e @var{entry}
478@kindex --entry=@var{entry}
479@item -e @var{entry}
480@itemx --entry=@var{entry}
481Use @var{entry} as the explicit symbol for beginning execution of your
482program, rather than the default entry point.  If there is no symbol
483named @var{entry}, the linker will try to parse @var{entry} as a number,
484and use that as the entry address (the number will be interpreted in
485base 10; you may use a leading @samp{0x} for base 16, or a leading
486@samp{0} for base 8).  @xref{Entry Point}, for a discussion of defaults
487and other ways of specifying the entry point.
488
489@kindex --exclude-libs
490@item --exclude-libs @var{lib},@var{lib},...
491Specifies a list of archive libraries from which symbols should not be automatically
492exported.  The library names may be delimited by commas or colons.  Specifying
493@code{--exclude-libs ALL} excludes symbols in all archive libraries from
494automatic export.  This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted
495port of the linker and for ELF targeted ports.  For i386 PE, symbols
496explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported, regardless of this
497option.  For ELF targeted ports, symbols affected by this option will
498be treated as hidden.
499
500@kindex --exclude-modules-for-implib
501@item --exclude-modules-for-implib @var{module},@var{module},...
502Specifies a list of object files or archive members, from which symbols
503should not be automatically exported, but which should be copied wholesale
504into the import library being generated during the link.  The module names
505may be delimited by commas or colons, and must match exactly the filenames
506used by @command{ld} to open the files; for archive members, this is simply
507the member name, but for object files the name listed must include and
508match precisely any path used to specify the input file on the linker's
509command-line.  This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted port
510of the linker.  Symbols explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported,
511regardless of this option.
512
513@cindex dynamic symbol table
514@kindex -E
515@kindex --export-dynamic
516@kindex --no-export-dynamic
517@item -E
518@itemx --export-dynamic
519@itemx --no-export-dynamic
520When creating a dynamically linked executable, using the @option{-E}
521option or the @option{--export-dynamic} option causes the linker to add
522all symbols to the dynamic symbol table.  The dynamic symbol table is the
523set of symbols which are visible from dynamic objects at run time.
524
525If you do not use either of these options (or use the
526@option{--no-export-dynamic} option to restore the default behavior), the
527dynamic symbol table will normally contain only those symbols which are
528referenced by some dynamic object mentioned in the link.
529
530If you use @code{dlopen} to load a dynamic object which needs to refer
531back to the symbols defined by the program, rather than some other
532dynamic object, then you will probably need to use this option when
533linking the program itself.
534
535You can also use the dynamic list to control what symbols should
536be added to the dynamic symbol table if the output format supports it.
537See the description of @samp{--dynamic-list}.
538
539Note that this option is specific to ELF targeted ports.  PE targets
540support a similar function to export all symbols from a DLL or EXE; see
541the description of @samp{--export-all-symbols} below.
542
543@ifclear SingleFormat
544@cindex big-endian objects
545@cindex endianness
546@kindex -EB
547@item -EB
548Link big-endian objects.  This affects the default output format.
549
550@cindex little-endian objects
551@kindex -EL
552@item -EL
553Link little-endian objects.  This affects the default output format.
554@end ifclear
555
556@kindex -f @var{name}
557@kindex --auxiliary=@var{name}
558@item -f @var{name}
559@itemx --auxiliary=@var{name}
560When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_AUXILIARY field
561to the specified name.  This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol
562table of the shared object should be used as an auxiliary filter on the
563symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
564
565If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
566run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_AUXILIARY field.  If
567the dynamic linker resolves any symbols from the filter object, it will
568first check whether there is a definition in the shared object
569@var{name}.  If there is one, it will be used instead of the definition
570in the filter object.  The shared object @var{name} need not exist.
571Thus the shared object @var{name} may be used to provide an alternative
572implementation of certain functions, perhaps for debugging or for
573machine specific performance.
574
575This option may be specified more than once.  The DT_AUXILIARY entries
576will be created in the order in which they appear on the command line.
577
578@kindex -F @var{name}
579@kindex --filter=@var{name}
580@item -F @var{name}
581@itemx --filter=@var{name}
582When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_FILTER field to
583the specified name.  This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol table
584of the shared object which is being created should be used as a filter
585on the symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
586
587If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
588run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_FILTER field.  The
589dynamic linker will resolve symbols according to the symbol table of the
590filter object as usual, but it will actually link to the definitions
591found in the shared object @var{name}.  Thus the filter object can be
592used to select a subset of the symbols provided by the object
593@var{name}.
594
595Some older linkers used the @option{-F} option throughout a compilation
596toolchain for specifying object-file format for both input and output
597object files.
598@ifclear SingleFormat
599The @sc{gnu} linker uses other mechanisms for this purpose: the
600@option{-b}, @option{--format}, @option{--oformat} options, the
601@code{TARGET} command in linker scripts, and the @code{GNUTARGET}
602environment variable.
603@end ifclear
604The @sc{gnu} linker will ignore the @option{-F} option when not
605creating an ELF shared object.
606
607@cindex finalization function
608@kindex -fini=@var{name}
609@item -fini=@var{name}
610When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
611executable or shared object is unloaded, by setting DT_FINI to the
612address of the function.  By default, the linker uses @code{_fini} as
613the function to call.
614
615@kindex -g
616@item -g
617Ignored.  Provided for compatibility with other tools.
618
619@kindex -G @var{value}
620@kindex --gpsize=@var{value}
621@cindex object size
622@item -G @var{value}
623@itemx --gpsize=@var{value}
624Set the maximum size of objects to be optimized using the GP register to
625@var{size}.  This is only meaningful for object file formats such as
626MIPS ECOFF which supports putting large and small objects into different
627sections.  This is ignored for other object file formats.
628
629@cindex runtime library name
630@kindex -h @var{name}
631@kindex -soname=@var{name}
632@item -h @var{name}
633@itemx -soname=@var{name}
634When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_SONAME field to
635the specified name.  When an executable is linked with a shared object
636which has a DT_SONAME field, then when the executable is run the dynamic
637linker will attempt to load the shared object specified by the DT_SONAME
638field rather than the using the file name given to the linker.
639
640@kindex -i
641@cindex incremental link
642@item -i
643Perform an incremental link (same as option @samp{-r}).
644
645@cindex initialization function
646@kindex -init=@var{name}
647@item -init=@var{name}
648When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
649executable or shared object is loaded, by setting DT_INIT to the address
650of the function.  By default, the linker uses @code{_init} as the
651function to call.
652
653@cindex archive files, from cmd line
654@kindex -l @var{namespec}
655@kindex --library=@var{namespec}
656@item -l @var{namespec}
657@itemx --library=@var{namespec}
658Add the archive or object file specified by @var{namespec} to the
659list of files to link.  This option may be used any number of times.
660If @var{namespec} is of the form @file{:@var{filename}}, @command{ld}
661will search the library path for a file called @var{filename}, otherwise it
662will search the library path for a file called @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}.
663
664On systems which support shared libraries, @command{ld} may also search for
665files other than @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}.  Specifically, on ELF
666and SunOS systems, @command{ld} will search a directory for a library
667called @file{lib@var{namespec}.so} before searching for one called
668@file{lib@var{namespec}.a}.  (By convention, a @code{.so} extension
669indicates a shared library.)  Note that this behavior does not apply
670to @file{:@var{filename}}, which always specifies a file called
671@var{filename}.
672
673The linker will search an archive only once, at the location where it is
674specified on the command line.  If the archive defines a symbol which
675was undefined in some object which appeared before the archive on the
676command line, the linker will include the appropriate file(s) from the
677archive.  However, an undefined symbol in an object appearing later on
678the command line will not cause the linker to search the archive again.
679
680See the @option{-(} option for a way to force the linker to search
681archives multiple times.
682
683You may list the same archive multiple times on the command line.
684
685@ifset GENERIC
686This type of archive searching is standard for Unix linkers.  However,
687if you are using @command{ld} on AIX, note that it is different from the
688behaviour of the AIX linker.
689@end ifset
690
691@cindex search directory, from cmd line
692@kindex -L @var{dir}
693@kindex --library-path=@var{dir}
694@item -L @var{searchdir}
695@itemx --library-path=@var{searchdir}
696Add path @var{searchdir} to the list of paths that @command{ld} will search
697for archive libraries and @command{ld} control scripts.  You may use this
698option any number of times.  The directories are searched in the order
699in which they are specified on the command line.  Directories specified
700on the command line are searched before the default directories.  All
701@option{-L} options apply to all @option{-l} options, regardless of the
702order in which the options appear.  @option{-L} options do not affect
703how @command{ld} searches for a linker script unless @option{-T}
704option is specified.
705
706If @var{searchdir} begins with @code{=}, then the @code{=} will be replaced
707by the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, a path specified when the linker is configured.
708
709@ifset UsesEnvVars
710The default set of paths searched (without being specified with
711@samp{-L}) depends on which emulation mode @command{ld} is using, and in
712some cases also on how it was configured.  @xref{Environment}.
713@end ifset
714
715The paths can also be specified in a link script with the
716@code{SEARCH_DIR} command.  Directories specified this way are searched
717at the point in which the linker script appears in the command line.
718
719@cindex emulation
720@kindex -m @var{emulation}
721@item -m @var{emulation}
722Emulate the @var{emulation} linker.  You can list the available
723emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options.
724
725If the @samp{-m} option is not used, the emulation is taken from the
726@code{LDEMULATION} environment variable, if that is defined.
727
728Otherwise, the default emulation depends upon how the linker was
729configured.
730
731@cindex link map
732@kindex -M
733@kindex --print-map
734@item -M
735@itemx --print-map
736Print a link map to the standard output.  A link map provides
737information about the link, including the following:
738
739@itemize @bullet
740@item
741Where object files are mapped into memory.
742@item
743How common symbols are allocated.
744@item
745All archive members included in the link, with a mention of the symbol
746which caused the archive member to be brought in.
747@item
748The values assigned to symbols.
749
750Note - symbols whose values are computed by an expression which
751involves a reference to a previous value of the same symbol may not
752have correct result displayed in the link map.  This is because the
753linker discards intermediate results and only retains the final value
754of an expression.  Under such circumstances the linker will display
755the final value enclosed by square brackets.  Thus for example a
756linker script containing:
757
758@smallexample
759   foo = 1
760   foo = foo * 4
761   foo = foo + 8
762@end smallexample
763
764will produce the following output in the link map if the @option{-M}
765option is used:
766
767@smallexample
768   0x00000001                foo = 0x1
769   [0x0000000c]                foo = (foo * 0x4)
770   [0x0000000c]                foo = (foo + 0x8)
771@end smallexample
772
773See @ref{Expressions} for more information about expressions in linker
774scripts.
775@end itemize
776
777@kindex -n
778@cindex read-only text
779@cindex NMAGIC
780@kindex --nmagic
781@item -n
782@itemx --nmagic
783Turn off page alignment of sections, and disable linking against shared
784libraries.  If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
785mark the output as @code{NMAGIC}.
786
787@kindex -N
788@kindex --omagic
789@cindex read/write from cmd line
790@cindex OMAGIC
791@item -N
792@itemx --omagic
793Set the text and data sections to be readable and writable.  Also, do
794not page-align the data segment, and disable linking against shared
795libraries.  If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
796mark the output as @code{OMAGIC}. Note: Although a writable text section
797is allowed for PE-COFF targets, it does not conform to the format
798specification published by Microsoft.
799
800@kindex --no-omagic
801@cindex OMAGIC
802@item --no-omagic
803This option negates most of the effects of the @option{-N} option.  It
804sets the text section to be read-only, and forces the data segment to
805be page-aligned.  Note - this option does not enable linking against
806shared libraries.  Use @option{-Bdynamic} for this.
807
808@kindex -o @var{output}
809@kindex --output=@var{output}
810@cindex naming the output file
811@item -o @var{output}
812@itemx --output=@var{output}
813Use @var{output} as the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; if this
814option is not specified, the name @file{a.out} is used by default.  The
815script command @code{OUTPUT} can also specify the output file name.
816
817@kindex -O @var{level}
818@cindex generating optimized output
819@item -O @var{level}
820If @var{level} is a numeric values greater than zero @command{ld} optimizes
821the output.  This might take significantly longer and therefore probably
822should only be enabled for the final binary.  At the moment this
823option only affects ELF shared library generation.  Future releases of
824the linker may make more use of this option.  Also currently there is
825no difference in the linker's behaviour for different non-zero values
826of this option.  Again this may change with future releases.
827
828@kindex -q
829@kindex --emit-relocs
830@cindex retain relocations in final executable
831@item -q
832@itemx --emit-relocs
833Leave relocation sections and contents in fully linked executables.
834Post link analysis and optimization tools may need this information in
835order to perform correct modifications of executables.  This results
836in larger executables.
837
838This option is currently only supported on ELF platforms.
839
840@kindex --force-dynamic
841@cindex forcing the creation of dynamic sections
842@item --force-dynamic
843Force the output file to have dynamic sections.  This option is specific
844to VxWorks targets.
845
846@cindex partial link
847@cindex relocatable output
848@kindex -r
849@kindex --relocatable
850@item -r
851@itemx --relocatable
852Generate relocatable output---i.e., generate an output file that can in
853turn serve as input to @command{ld}.  This is often called @dfn{partial
854linking}.  As a side effect, in environments that support standard Unix
855magic numbers, this option also sets the output file's magic number to
856@code{OMAGIC}.
857@c ; see @option{-N}.
858If this option is not specified, an absolute file is produced.  When
859linking C++ programs, this option @emph{will not} resolve references to
860constructors; to do that, use @samp{-Ur}.
861
862When an input file does not have the same format as the output file,
863partial linking is only supported if that input file does not contain any
864relocations.  Different output formats can have further restrictions; for
865example some @code{a.out}-based formats do not support partial linking
866with input files in other formats at all.
867
868This option does the same thing as @samp{-i}.
869
870@kindex -R @var{file}
871@kindex --just-symbols=@var{file}
872@cindex symbol-only input
873@item -R @var{filename}
874@itemx --just-symbols=@var{filename}
875Read symbol names and their addresses from @var{filename}, but do not
876relocate it or include it in the output.  This allows your output file
877to refer symbolically to absolute locations of memory defined in other
878programs.  You may use this option more than once.
879
880For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
881followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
882the @option{-rpath} option.
883
884@kindex -s
885@kindex --strip-all
886@cindex strip all symbols
887@item -s
888@itemx --strip-all
889Omit all symbol information from the output file.
890
891@kindex -S
892@kindex --strip-debug
893@cindex strip debugger symbols
894@item -S
895@itemx --strip-debug
896Omit debugger symbol information (but not all symbols) from the output file.
897
898@kindex -t
899@kindex --trace
900@cindex input files, displaying
901@item -t
902@itemx --trace
903Print the names of the input files as @command{ld} processes them.
904
905@kindex -T @var{script}
906@kindex --script=@var{script}
907@cindex script files
908@item -T @var{scriptfile}
909@itemx --script=@var{scriptfile}
910Use @var{scriptfile} as the linker script.  This script replaces
911@command{ld}'s default linker script (rather than adding to it), so
912@var{commandfile} must specify everything necessary to describe the
913output file.  @xref{Scripts}.  If @var{scriptfile} does not exist in
914the current directory, @code{ld} looks for it in the directories
915specified by any preceding @samp{-L} options.  Multiple @samp{-T}
916options accumulate.
917
918@kindex -dT @var{script}
919@kindex --default-script=@var{script}
920@cindex script files
921@item -dT @var{scriptfile}
922@itemx --default-script=@var{scriptfile}
923Use @var{scriptfile} as the default linker script.  @xref{Scripts}.
924
925This option is similar to the @option{--script} option except that
926processing of the script is delayed until after the rest of the
927command line has been processed.  This allows options placed after the
928@option{--default-script} option on the command line to affect the
929behaviour of the linker script, which can be important when the linker
930command line cannot be directly controlled by the user.  (eg because
931the command line is being constructed by another tool, such as
932@samp{gcc}).
933
934@kindex -u @var{symbol}
935@kindex --undefined=@var{symbol}
936@cindex undefined symbol
937@item -u @var{symbol}
938@itemx --undefined=@var{symbol}
939Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
940symbol.  Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
941modules from standard libraries.  @samp{-u} may be repeated with
942different option arguments to enter additional undefined symbols.  This
943option is equivalent to the @code{EXTERN} linker script command.
944
945@kindex -Ur
946@cindex constructors
947@item -Ur
948For anything other than C++ programs, this option is equivalent to
949@samp{-r}: it generates relocatable output---i.e., an output file that can in
950turn serve as input to @command{ld}.  When linking C++ programs, @samp{-Ur}
951@emph{does} resolve references to constructors, unlike @samp{-r}.
952It does not work to use @samp{-Ur} on files that were themselves linked
953with @samp{-Ur}; once the constructor table has been built, it cannot
954be added to.  Use @samp{-Ur} only for the last partial link, and
955@samp{-r} for the others.
956
957@kindex --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
958@item --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
959Creates a separate output section for every input section matching
960@var{SECTION}, or if the optional wildcard @var{SECTION} argument is
961missing, for every orphan input section.  An orphan section is one not
962specifically mentioned in a linker script.  You may use this option
963multiple times on the command line;  It prevents the normal merging of
964input sections with the same name, overriding output section assignments
965in a linker script.
966
967@kindex -v
968@kindex -V
969@kindex --version
970@cindex version
971@item -v
972@itemx --version
973@itemx -V
974Display the version number for @command{ld}.  The @option{-V} option also
975lists the supported emulations.
976
977@kindex -x
978@kindex --discard-all
979@cindex deleting local symbols
980@item -x
981@itemx --discard-all
982Delete all local symbols.
983
984@kindex -X
985@kindex --discard-locals
986@cindex local symbols, deleting
987@item -X
988@itemx --discard-locals
989Delete all temporary local symbols.  (These symbols start with
990system-specific local label prefixes, typically @samp{.L} for ELF systems
991or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems.)
992
993@kindex -y @var{symbol}
994@kindex --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
995@cindex symbol tracing
996@item -y @var{symbol}
997@itemx --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
998Print the name of each linked file in which @var{symbol} appears.  This
999option may be given any number of times.  On many systems it is necessary
1000to prepend an underscore.
1001
1002This option is useful when you have an undefined symbol in your link but
1003don't know where the reference is coming from.
1004
1005@kindex -Y @var{path}
1006@item -Y @var{path}
1007Add @var{path} to the default library search path.  This option exists
1008for Solaris compatibility.
1009
1010@kindex -z @var{keyword}
1011@item -z @var{keyword}
1012The recognized keywords are:
1013@table @samp
1014
1015@item combreloc
1016Combines multiple reloc sections and sorts them to make dynamic symbol
1017lookup caching possible.
1018
1019@item defs
1020Disallows undefined symbols in object files.  Undefined symbols in
1021shared libraries are still allowed.
1022
1023@item execstack
1024Marks the object as requiring executable stack.
1025
1026@item initfirst
1027This option is only meaningful when building a shared object.
1028It marks the object so that its runtime initialization will occur
1029before the runtime initialization of any other objects brought into
1030the process at the same time.  Similarly the runtime finalization of
1031the object will occur after the runtime finalization of any other
1032objects.
1033
1034@item interpose
1035Marks the object that its symbol table interposes before all symbols
1036but the primary executable.
1037
1038@item lazy
1039When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1040dynamic linker to defer function call resolution to the point when
1041the function is called (lazy binding), rather than at load time.
1042Lazy binding is the default.
1043
1044@item loadfltr
1045Marks  the object that its filters be processed immediately at
1046runtime.
1047
1048@item muldefs
1049Allows multiple definitions.
1050
1051@item nocombreloc
1052Disables multiple reloc sections combining.
1053
1054@item nocopyreloc
1055Disables production of copy relocs.
1056
1057@item nodefaultlib
1058Marks the object that the search for dependencies of this object will
1059ignore any default library search paths.
1060
1061@item nodelete
1062Marks the object shouldn't be unloaded at runtime.
1063
1064@item nodlopen
1065Marks the object not available to @code{dlopen}.
1066
1067@item nodump
1068Marks the object can not be dumped by @code{dldump}.
1069
1070@item noexecstack
1071Marks the object as not requiring executable stack.
1072
1073@item norelro
1074Don't create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object.
1075
1076@item now
1077When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1078dynamic linker to resolve all symbols when the program is started, or
1079when the shared library is linked to using dlopen, instead of
1080deferring function call resolution to the point when the function is
1081first called.
1082
1083@item origin
1084Marks the object may contain $ORIGIN.
1085
1086@item relro
1087Create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object.
1088
1089@item max-page-size=@var{value}
1090Set the emulation maximum page size to @var{value}.
1091
1092@item common-page-size=@var{value}
1093Set the emulation common page size to @var{value}.
1094
1095@end table
1096
1097Other keywords are ignored for Solaris compatibility.
1098
1099@kindex -(
1100@cindex groups of archives
1101@item -( @var{archives} -)
1102@itemx --start-group @var{archives} --end-group
1103The @var{archives} should be a list of archive files.  They may be
1104either explicit file names, or @samp{-l} options.
1105
1106The specified archives are searched repeatedly until no new undefined
1107references are created.  Normally, an archive is searched only once in
1108the order that it is specified on the command line.  If a symbol in that
1109archive is needed to resolve an undefined symbol referred to by an
1110object in an archive that appears later on the command line, the linker
1111would not be able to resolve that reference.  By grouping the archives,
1112they all be searched repeatedly until all possible references are
1113resolved.
1114
1115Using this option has a significant performance cost.  It is best to use
1116it only when there are unavoidable circular references between two or
1117more archives.
1118
1119@kindex --accept-unknown-input-arch
1120@kindex --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1121@item --accept-unknown-input-arch
1122@itemx --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1123Tells the linker to accept input files whose architecture cannot be
1124recognised.  The assumption is that the user knows what they are doing
1125and deliberately wants to link in these unknown input files.  This was
1126the default behaviour of the linker, before release 2.14.  The default
1127behaviour from release 2.14 onwards is to reject such input files, and
1128so the @samp{--accept-unknown-input-arch} option has been added to
1129restore the old behaviour.
1130
1131@kindex --as-needed
1132@kindex --no-as-needed
1133@item --as-needed
1134@itemx --no-as-needed
1135This option affects ELF DT_NEEDED tags for dynamic libraries mentioned
1136on the command line after the @option{--as-needed} option.  Normally
1137the linker will add a DT_NEEDED tag for each dynamic library mentioned
1138on the command line, regardless of whether the library is actually
1139needed or not.  @option{--as-needed} causes a DT_NEEDED tag to only be
1140emitted for a library that satisfies an undefined symbol reference
1141from a regular object file or, if the library is not found in the
1142DT_NEEDED lists of other libraries linked up to that point, an
1143undefined symbol reference from another dynamic library.
1144@option{--no-as-needed} restores the default behaviour.
1145
1146@kindex --add-needed
1147@kindex --no-add-needed
1148@item --add-needed
1149@itemx --no-add-needed
1150These two options have been deprecated because of the similarity of
1151their names to the @option{--as-needed} and @option{--no-as-needed}
1152options.  They have been replaced by @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
1153and @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
1154
1155@kindex -assert @var{keyword}
1156@item -assert @var{keyword}
1157This option is ignored for SunOS compatibility.
1158
1159@kindex -Bdynamic
1160@kindex -dy
1161@kindex -call_shared
1162@item -Bdynamic
1163@itemx -dy
1164@itemx -call_shared
1165Link against dynamic libraries.  This is only meaningful on platforms
1166for which shared libraries are supported.  This option is normally the
1167default on such platforms.  The different variants of this option are
1168for compatibility with various systems.  You may use this option
1169multiple times on the command line: it affects library searching for
1170@option{-l} options which follow it.
1171
1172@kindex -Bgroup
1173@item -Bgroup
1174Set the @code{DF_1_GROUP} flag in the @code{DT_FLAGS_1} entry in the dynamic
1175section.  This causes the runtime linker to handle lookups in this
1176object and its dependencies to be performed only inside the group.
1177@option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all} is implied.  This option is
1178only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared libraries.
1179
1180@kindex -Bstatic
1181@kindex -dn
1182@kindex -non_shared
1183@kindex -static
1184@item -Bstatic
1185@itemx -dn
1186@itemx -non_shared
1187@itemx -static
1188Do not link against shared libraries.  This is only meaningful on
1189platforms for which shared libraries are supported.  The different
1190variants of this option are for compatibility with various systems.  You
1191may use this option multiple times on the command line: it affects
1192library searching for @option{-l} options which follow it.  This
1193option also implies @option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all}.  This
1194option can be used with @option{-shared}.  Doing so means that a
1195shared library is being created but that all of the library's external
1196references must be resolved by pulling in entries from static
1197libraries.
1198
1199@kindex -Bsymbolic
1200@item -Bsymbolic
1201When creating a shared library, bind references to global symbols to the
1202definition within the shared library, if any.  Normally, it is possible
1203for a program linked against a shared library to override the definition
1204within the shared library.  This option is only meaningful on ELF
1205platforms which support shared libraries.
1206
1207@kindex -Bsymbolic-functions
1208@item -Bsymbolic-functions
1209When creating a shared library, bind references to global function
1210symbols to the definition within the shared library, if any.
1211This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared
1212libraries.
1213
1214@kindex --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1215@item --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1216Specify the name of a dynamic list file to the linker.  This is
1217typically used when creating shared libraries to specify a list of
1218global symbols whose references shouldn't be bound to the definition
1219within the shared library, or creating dynamically linked executables
1220to specify a list of symbols which should be added to the symbol table
1221in the executable.  This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms
1222which support shared libraries.
1223
1224The format of the dynamic list is the same as the version node without
1225scope and node name.  See @ref{VERSION} for more information.
1226
1227@kindex --dynamic-list-data
1228@item --dynamic-list-data
1229Include all global data symbols to the dynamic list.
1230
1231@kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1232@item --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1233Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ operator new and delete.  It
1234is mainly useful for building shared libstdc++.
1235
1236@kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1237@item --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1238Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ runtime type identification.
1239
1240@kindex --check-sections
1241@kindex --no-check-sections
1242@item --check-sections
1243@itemx --no-check-sections
1244Asks the linker @emph{not} to check section addresses after they have
1245been assigned to see if there are any overlaps.  Normally the linker will
1246perform this check, and if it finds any overlaps it will produce
1247suitable error messages.  The linker does know about, and does make
1248allowances for sections in overlays.  The default behaviour can be
1249restored by using the command line switch @option{--check-sections}.
1250Section overlap is not usually checked for relocatable links.  You can
1251force checking in that case by using the @option{--check-sections}
1252option.
1253
1254@kindex --copy-dt-needed-entries
1255@kindex --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
1256@item --copy-dt-needed-entries
1257@itemx --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
1258This option affects the treatment of dynamic libraries referred to 
1259by DT_NEEDED tags @emph{inside} ELF dynamic libraries mentioned on the
1260command line.  Normally the linker will add a DT_NEEDED tag to the
1261output binary for each library mentioned in a DT_NEEDED tag in an
1262input dynamic library.  With @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}
1263specified on the command line however any dynamic libraries that
1264follow it will have their DT_NEEDED entries ignored.  The default
1265behaviour can be restored with @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}.
1266
1267This option also has an effect on the resolution of symbols in dynamic
1268libraries.  With the default setting dynamic libraries mentioned on
1269the command line will be recursively searched, following their
1270DT_NEEDED tags to other libraries, in order to resolve symbols
1271required by the output binary.  With
1272@option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries} specified however the searching
1273of dynamic libraries that follow it will stop with the dynamic
1274library itself.  No DT_NEEDED links will be traversed to resolve
1275symbols.
1276
1277@cindex cross reference table
1278@kindex --cref
1279@item --cref
1280Output a cross reference table.  If a linker map file is being
1281generated, the cross reference table is printed to the map file.
1282Otherwise, it is printed on the standard output.
1283
1284The format of the table is intentionally simple, so that it may be
1285easily processed by a script if necessary.  The symbols are printed out,
1286sorted by name.  For each symbol, a list of file names is given.  If the
1287symbol is defined, the first file listed is the location of the
1288definition.  The remaining files contain references to the symbol.
1289
1290@cindex common allocation
1291@kindex --no-define-common
1292@item --no-define-common
1293This option inhibits the assignment of addresses to common symbols.
1294The script command @code{INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
1295@xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
1296
1297The @samp{--no-define-common} option allows decoupling
1298the decision to assign addresses to Common symbols from the choice
1299of the output file type; otherwise a non-Relocatable output type
1300forces assigning addresses to Common symbols.
1301Using @samp{--no-define-common} allows Common symbols that are referenced
1302from a shared library to be assigned addresses only in the main program.
1303This eliminates the unused duplicate space in the shared library,
1304and also prevents any possible confusion over resolving to the wrong
1305duplicate when there are many dynamic modules with specialized search
1306paths for runtime symbol resolution.
1307
1308@cindex symbols, from command line
1309@kindex --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{exp}
1310@item --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{expression}
1311Create a global symbol in the output file, containing the absolute
1312address given by @var{expression}.  You may use this option as many
1313times as necessary to define multiple symbols in the command line.  A
1314limited form of arithmetic is supported for the @var{expression} in this
1315context: you may give a hexadecimal constant or the name of an existing
1316symbol, or use @code{+} and @code{-} to add or subtract hexadecimal
1317constants or symbols.  If you need more elaborate expressions, consider
1318using the linker command language from a script (@pxref{Assignments,,
1319Assignment: Symbol Definitions}).  @emph{Note:} there should be no white
1320space between @var{symbol}, the equals sign (``@key{=}''), and
1321@var{expression}.
1322
1323@cindex demangling, from command line
1324@kindex --demangle[=@var{style}]
1325@kindex --no-demangle
1326@item --demangle[=@var{style}]
1327@itemx --no-demangle
1328These options control whether to demangle symbol names in error messages
1329and other output.  When the linker is told to demangle, it tries to
1330present symbol names in a readable fashion: it strips leading
1331underscores if they are used by the object file format, and converts C++
1332mangled symbol names into user readable names.  Different compilers have
1333different mangling styles.  The optional demangling style argument can be used
1334to choose an appropriate demangling style for your compiler.  The linker will
1335demangle by default unless the environment variable @samp{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}
1336is set.  These options may be used to override the default.
1337
1338@cindex dynamic linker, from command line
1339@kindex -I@var{file}
1340@kindex --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
1341@item -I@var{file}
1342@itemx --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
1343Set the name of the dynamic linker.  This is only meaningful when
1344generating dynamically linked ELF executables.  The default dynamic
1345linker is normally correct; don't use this unless you know what you are
1346doing.
1347
1348@kindex --fatal-warnings
1349@kindex --no-fatal-warnings
1350@item --fatal-warnings
1351@itemx --no-fatal-warnings
1352Treat all warnings as errors.  The default behaviour can be restored
1353with the option @option{--no-fatal-warnings}.
1354
1355@kindex --force-exe-suffix
1356@item  --force-exe-suffix
1357Make sure that an output file has a .exe suffix.
1358
1359If a successfully built fully linked output file does not have a
1360@code{.exe} or @code{.dll} suffix, this option forces the linker to copy
1361the output file to one of the same name with a @code{.exe} suffix. This
1362option is useful when using unmodified Unix makefiles on a Microsoft
1363Windows host, since some versions of Windows won't run an image unless
1364it ends in a @code{.exe} suffix.
1365
1366@kindex --gc-sections
1367@kindex --no-gc-sections
1368@cindex garbage collection
1369@item --gc-sections
1370@itemx --no-gc-sections
1371Enable garbage collection of unused input sections.  It is ignored on
1372targets that do not support this option.  The default behaviour (of not
1373performing this garbage collection) can be restored by specifying
1374@samp{--no-gc-sections} on the command line.
1375
1376@samp{--gc-sections} decides which input sections are used by
1377examining symbols and relocations.  The section containing the entry
1378symbol and all sections containing symbols undefined on the
1379command-line will be kept, as will sections containing symbols
1380referenced by dynamic objects.  Note that when building shared
1381libraries, the linker must assume that any visible symbol is
1382referenced.  Once this initial set of sections has been determined,
1383the linker recursively marks as used any section referenced by their
1384relocations.  See @samp{--entry} and @samp{--undefined}.
1385
1386This option can be set when doing a partial link (enabled with option
1387@samp{-r}).  In this case the root of symbols kept must be explicitly 
1388specified either by an @samp{--entry} or @samp{--undefined} option or by
1389a @code{ENTRY} command in the linker script.
1390
1391@kindex --print-gc-sections
1392@kindex --no-print-gc-sections
1393@cindex garbage collection
1394@item --print-gc-sections
1395@itemx --no-print-gc-sections
1396List all sections removed by garbage collection.  The listing is
1397printed on stderr.  This option is only effective if garbage
1398collection has been enabled via the @samp{--gc-sections}) option.  The
1399default behaviour (of not listing the sections that are removed) can
1400be restored by specifying @samp{--no-print-gc-sections} on the command
1401line.
1402
1403@cindex help
1404@cindex usage
1405@kindex --help
1406@item --help
1407Print a summary of the command-line options on the standard output and exit.
1408
1409@kindex --target-help
1410@item --target-help
1411Print a summary of all target specific options on the standard output and exit.
1412
1413@kindex -Map=@var{mapfile}
1414@item -Map=@var{mapfile}
1415Print a link map to the file @var{mapfile}.  See the description of the
1416@option{-M} option, above.
1417
1418@cindex memory usage
1419@kindex --no-keep-memory
1420@item --no-keep-memory
1421@command{ld} normally optimizes for speed over memory usage by caching the
1422symbol tables of input files in memory.  This option tells @command{ld} to
1423instead optimize for memory usage, by rereading the symbol tables as
1424necessary.  This may be required if @command{ld} runs out of memory space
1425while linking a large executable.
1426
1427@kindex --no-undefined
1428@kindex -z defs
1429@item --no-undefined
1430@itemx -z defs
1431Report unresolved symbol references from regular object files.  This
1432is done even if the linker is creating a non-symbolic shared library.
1433The switch @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} controls the
1434behaviour for reporting unresolved references found in shared
1435libraries being linked in.
1436
1437@kindex --allow-multiple-definition
1438@kindex -z muldefs
1439@item --allow-multiple-definition
1440@itemx -z muldefs
1441Normally when a symbol is defined multiple times, the linker will
1442report a fatal error. These options allow multiple definitions and the
1443first definition will be used.
1444
1445@kindex --allow-shlib-undefined
1446@kindex --no-allow-shlib-undefined
1447@item --allow-shlib-undefined
1448@itemx --no-allow-shlib-undefined
1449Allows or disallows undefined symbols in shared libraries.
1450This switch is similar to @option{--no-undefined} except that it
1451determines the behaviour when the undefined symbols are in a
1452shared library rather than a regular object file.  It does not affect
1453how undefined symbols in regular object files are handled.
1454
1455The default behaviour is to report errors for any undefined symbols
1456referenced in shared libraries if the linker is being used to create
1457an executable, but to allow them if the linker is being used to create
1458a shared library.
1459
1460The reasons for allowing undefined symbol references in shared
1461libraries specified at link time are that:
1462
1463@itemize @bullet
1464@item
1465A shared library specified at link time may not be the same as the one
1466that is available at load time, so the symbol might actually be
1467resolvable at load time.
1468@item
1469There are some operating systems, eg BeOS and HPPA, where undefined
1470symbols in shared libraries are normal.
1471
1472The BeOS kernel for example patches shared libraries at load time to
1473select whichever function is most appropriate for the current
1474architecture.  This is used, for example, to dynamically select an
1475appropriate memset function.
1476@end itemize
1477
1478@kindex --no-undefined-version
1479@item --no-undefined-version
1480Normally when a symbol has an undefined version, the linker will ignore
1481it. This option disallows symbols with undefined version and a fatal error
1482will be issued instead.
1483
1484@kindex --default-symver
1485@item --default-symver
1486Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
1487exported symbols.
1488
1489@kindex --default-imported-symver
1490@item --default-imported-symver
1491Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
1492imported symbols.
1493
1494@kindex --no-warn-mismatch
1495@item --no-warn-mismatch
1496Normally @command{ld} will give an error if you try to link together input
1497files that are mismatched for some reason, perhaps because they have
1498been compiled for different processors or for different endiannesses.
1499This option tells @command{ld} that it should silently permit such possible
1500errors.  This option should only be used with care, in cases when you
1501have taken some special action that ensures that the linker errors are
1502inappropriate.
1503
1504@kindex --no-warn-search-mismatch
1505@item --no-warn-search-mismatch
1506Normally @command{ld} will give a warning if it finds an incompatible
1507library during a library search.  This option silences the warning.
1508
1509@kindex --no-whole-archive
1510@item --no-whole-archive
1511Turn off the effect of the @option{--whole-archive} option for subsequent
1512archive files.
1513
1514@cindex output file after errors
1515@kindex --noinhibit-exec
1516@item --noinhibit-exec
1517Retain the executable output file whenever it is still usable.
1518Normally, the linker will not produce an output file if it encounters
1519errors during the link process; it exits without writing an output file
1520when it issues any error whatsoever.
1521
1522@kindex -nostdlib
1523@item -nostdlib
1524Only search library directories explicitly specified on the
1525command line.  Library directories specified in linker scripts
1526(including linker scripts specified on the command line) are ignored.
1527
1528@ifclear SingleFormat
1529@kindex --oformat=@var{output-format}
1530@item --oformat=@var{output-format}
1531@command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
1532file.  If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
1533@samp{--oformat} option to specify the binary format for the output
1534object file.  Even when @command{ld} is configured to support alternative
1535object formats, you don't usually need to specify this, as @command{ld}
1536should be configured to produce as a default output format the most
1537usual format on each machine.  @var{output-format} is a text string, the
1538name of a particular format supported by the BFD libraries.  (You can
1539list the available binary formats with @samp{objdump -i}.)  The script
1540command @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} can also specify the output format, but
1541this option overrides it.  @xref{BFD}.
1542@end ifclear
1543
1544@kindex -pie
1545@kindex --pic-executable
1546@item -pie
1547@itemx --pic-executable
1548@cindex position independent executables
1549Create a position independent executable.  This is currently only supported on
1550ELF platforms.  Position independent executables are similar to shared
1551libraries in that they are relocated by the dynamic linker to the virtual
1552address the OS chooses for them (which can vary between invocations).  Like
1553normal dynamically linked executables they can be executed and symbols
1554defined in the executable cannot be overridden by shared libraries.
1555
1556@kindex -qmagic
1557@item -qmagic
1558This option is ignored for Linux compatibility.
1559
1560@kindex -Qy
1561@item -Qy
1562This option is ignored for SVR4 compatibility.
1563
1564@kindex --relax
1565@cindex synthesizing linker
1566@cindex relaxing addressing modes
1567@cindex --no-relax
1568@item --relax
1569@itemx --no-relax
1570An option with machine dependent effects.
1571@ifset GENERIC
1572This option is only supported on a few targets.
1573@end ifset
1574@ifset H8300
1575@xref{H8/300,,@command{ld} and the H8/300}.
1576@end ifset
1577@ifset I960
1578@xref{i960,, @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family}.
1579@end ifset
1580@ifset XTENSA
1581@xref{Xtensa,, @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors}.
1582@end ifset
1583@ifset M68HC11
1584@xref{M68HC11/68HC12,,@command{ld} and the 68HC11 and 68HC12}.
1585@end ifset
1586@ifset POWERPC
1587@xref{PowerPC ELF32,,@command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support}.
1588@end ifset
1589
1590On some platforms the @samp{--relax} option performs target specific,
1591global optimizations that become possible when the linker resolves
1592addressing in the program, such as relaxing address modes,
1593synthesizing new instructions, selecting shorter version of current
1594instructions, and combinig constant values.
1595
1596On some platforms these link time global optimizations may make symbolic
1597debugging of the resulting executable impossible.
1598@ifset GENERIC
1599This is known to be the case for the Matsushita MN10200 and MN10300
1600family of processors.
1601@end ifset
1602
1603@ifset GENERIC
1604On platforms where this is not supported, @samp{--relax} is accepted,
1605but ignored.
1606@end ifset
1607
1608On platforms where @samp{--relax} is accepted the option
1609@samp{--no-relax} can be used to disable the feature.
1610
1611@cindex retaining specified symbols
1612@cindex stripping all but some symbols
1613@cindex symbols, retaining selectively
1614@kindex --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
1615@item --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
1616Retain @emph{only} the symbols listed in the file @var{filename},
1617discarding all others.  @var{filename} is simply a flat file, with one
1618symbol name per line.  This option is especially useful in environments
1619@ifset GENERIC
1620(such as VxWorks)
1621@end ifset
1622where a large global symbol table is accumulated gradually, to conserve
1623run-time memory.
1624
1625@samp{--retain-symbols-file} does @emph{not} discard undefined symbols,
1626or symbols needed for relocations.
1627
1628You may only specify @samp{--retain-symbols-file} once in the command
1629line.  It overrides @samp{-s} and @samp{-S}.
1630
1631@ifset GENERIC
1632@item -rpath=@var{dir}
1633@cindex runtime library search path
1634@kindex -rpath=@var{dir}
1635Add a directory to the runtime library search path.  This is used when
1636linking an ELF executable with shared objects.  All @option{-rpath}
1637arguments are concatenated and passed to the runtime linker, which uses
1638them to locate shared objects at runtime.  The @option{-rpath} option is
1639also used when locating shared objects which are needed by shared
1640objects explicitly included in the link; see the description of the
1641@option{-rpath-link} option.  If @option{-rpath} is not used when linking an
1642ELF executable, the contents of the environment variable
1643@code{LD_RUN_PATH} will be used if it is defined.
1644
1645The @option{-rpath} option may also be used on SunOS.  By default, on
1646SunOS, the linker will form a runtime search patch out of all the
1647@option{-L} options it is given.  If a @option{-rpath} option is used, the
1648runtime search path will be formed exclusively using the @option{-rpath}
1649options, ignoring the @option{-L} options.  This can be useful when using
1650gcc, which adds many @option{-L} options which may be on NFS mounted
1651file systems.
1652
1653For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
1654followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
1655the @option{-rpath} option.
1656@end ifset
1657
1658@ifset GENERIC
1659@cindex link-time runtime library search path
1660@kindex -rpath-link=@var{dir}
1661@item -rpath-link=@var{dir}
1662When using ELF or SunOS, one shared library may require another.  This
1663happens when an @code{ld -shared} link includes a shared library as one
1664of the input files.
1665
1666When the linker encounters such a dependency when doing a non-shared,
1667non-relocatable link, it will automatically try to locate the required
1668shared library and include it in the link, if it is not included
1669explicitly.  In such a case, the @option{-rpath-link} option
1670specifies the first set of directories to search.  The
1671@option{-rpath-link} option may specify a sequence of directory names
1672either by specifying a list of names separated by colons, or by
1673appearing multiple times.
1674
1675This option should be used with caution as it overrides the search path
1676that may have been hard compiled into a shared library. In such a case it
1677is possible to use unintentionally a different search path than the
1678runtime linker would do.
1679
1680The linker uses the following search paths to locate required shared
1681libraries:
1682@enumerate
1683@item
1684Any directories specified by @option{-rpath-link} options.
1685@item
1686Any directories specified by @option{-rpath} options.  The difference
1687between @option{-rpath} and @option{-rpath-link} is that directories
1688specified by @option{-rpath} options are included in the executable and
1689used at runtime, whereas the @option{-rpath-link} option is only effective
1690at link time. Searching @option{-rpath} in this way is only supported
1691by native linkers and cross linkers which have been configured with
1692the @option{--with-sysroot} option.
1693@item
1694On an ELF system, for native linkers, if the @option{-rpath} and
1695@option{-rpath-link} options were not used, search the contents of the
1696environment variable @code{LD_RUN_PATH}.
1697@item
1698On SunOS, if the @option{-rpath} option was not used, search any
1699directories specified using @option{-L} options.
1700@item
1701For a native linker, the search the contents of the environment
1702variable @code{LD_LIBRARY_PATH}.
1703@item
1704For a native ELF linker, the directories in @code{DT_RUNPATH} or
1705@code{DT_RPATH} of a shared library are searched for shared
1706libraries needed by it. The @code{DT_RPATH} entries are ignored if
1707@code{DT_RUNPATH} entries exist.
1708@item
1709The default directories, normally @file{/lib} and @file{/usr/lib}.
1710@item
1711For a native linker on an ELF system, if the file @file{/etc/ld.so.conf}
1712exists, the list of directories found in that file.
1713@end enumerate
1714
1715If the required shared library is not found, the linker will issue a
1716warning and continue with the link.
1717@end ifset
1718
1719@kindex -shared
1720@kindex -Bshareable
1721@item -shared
1722@itemx -Bshareable
1723@cindex shared libraries
1724Create a shared library.  This is currently only supported on ELF, XCOFF
1725and SunOS platforms.  On SunOS, the linker will automatically create a
1726shared library if the @option{-e} option is not used and there are
1727undefined symbols in the link.
1728
1729@kindex --sort-common
1730@item --sort-common
1731@itemx --sort-common=ascending
1732@itemx --sort-common=descending
1733This option tells @command{ld} to sort the common symbols by alignment in
1734ascending or descending order when it places them in the appropriate output
1735sections.  The symbol alignments considered are sixteen-byte or larger,
1736eight-byte, four-byte, two-byte, and one-byte. This is to prevent gaps
1737between symbols due to alignment constraints.  If no sorting order is
1738specified, then descending order is assumed.
1739
1740@kindex --sort-section=name
1741@item --sort-section=name
1742This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_NAME} to all wildcard section
1743patterns in the linker script.
1744
1745@kindex --sort-section=alignment
1746@item --sort-section=alignment
1747This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} to all wildcard section
1748patterns in the linker script.
1749
1750@kindex --split-by-file
1751@item --split-by-file[=@var{size}]
1752Similar to @option{--split-by-reloc} but creates a new output section for
1753each input file when @var{size} is reached.  @var{size} defaults to a
1754size of 1 if not given.
1755
1756@kindex --split-by-reloc
1757@item --split-by-reloc[=@var{count}]
1758Tries to creates extra sections in the output file so that no single
1759output section in the file contains more than @var{count} relocations.
1760This is useful when generating huge relocatable files for downloading into
1761certain real time kernels with the COFF object file format; since COFF
1762cannot represent more than 65535 relocations in a single section.  Note
1763that this will fail to work with object file formats which do not
1764support arbitrary sections.  The linker will not split up individual
1765input sections for redistribution, so if a single input section contains
1766more than @var{count} relocations one output section will contain that
1767many relocations.  @var{count} defaults to a value of 32768.
1768
1769@kindex --stats
1770@item --stats
1771Compute and display statistics about the operation of the linker, such
1772as execution time and memory usage.
1773
1774@kindex --sysroot=@var{directory}
1775@item --sysroot=@var{directory}
1776Use @var{directory} as the location of the sysroot, overriding the
1777configure-time default.  This option is only supported by linkers
1778that were configured using @option{--with-sysroot}.
1779
1780@kindex --traditional-format
1781@cindex traditional format
1782@item --traditional-format
1783For some targets, the output of @command{ld} is different in some ways from
1784the output of some existing linker.  This switch requests @command{ld} to
1785use the traditional format instead.
1786
1787@cindex dbx
1788For example, on SunOS, @command{ld} combines duplicate entries in the
1789symbol string table.  This can reduce the size of an output file with
1790full debugging information by over 30 percent.  Unfortunately, the SunOS
1791@code{dbx} program can not read the resulting program (@code{gdb} has no
1792trouble).  The @samp{--traditional-format} switch tells @command{ld} to not
1793combine duplicate entries.
1794
1795@kindex --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
1796@item --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
1797Locate a section in the output file at the absolute
1798address given by @var{org}.  You may use this option as many
1799times as necessary to locate multiple sections in the command
1800line.
1801@var{org} must be a single hexadecimal integer;
1802for compatibility with other linkers, you may omit the leading
1803@samp{0x} usually associated with hexadecimal values.  @emph{Note:} there
1804should be no white space between @var{sectionname}, the equals
1805sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{org}.
1806
1807@kindex -Tbss=@var{org}
1808@kindex -Tdata=@var{org}
1809@kindex -Ttext=@var{org}
1810@cindex segment origins, cmd line
1811@item -Tbss=@var{org}
1812@itemx -Tdata=@var{org}
1813@itemx -Ttext=@var{org}
1814Same as @option{--section-start}, with @code{.bss}, @code{.data} or
1815@code{.text} as the @var{sectionname}.
1816
1817@kindex -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
1818@item -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
1819@cindex text segment origin, cmd line
1820When creating an ELF executable or shared object, it will set the address
1821of the first byte of the text segment.
1822
1823@kindex --unresolved-symbols
1824@item --unresolved-symbols=@var{method}
1825Determine how to handle unresolved symbols.  There are four possible
1826values for @samp{method}:
1827
1828@table @samp
1829@item ignore-all
1830Do not report any unresolved symbols.
1831
1832@item report-all
1833Report all unresolved symbols.  This is the default.
1834
1835@item ignore-in-object-files
1836Report unresolved symbols that are contained in shared libraries, but
1837ignore them if they come from regular object files.
1838
1839@item ignore-in-shared-libs
1840Report unresolved symbols that come from regular object files, but
1841ignore them if they come from shared libraries.  This can be useful
1842when creating a dynamic binary and it is known that all the shared
1843libraries that it should be referencing are included on the linker's
1844command line.
1845@end table
1846
1847The behaviour for shared libraries on their own can also be controlled
1848by the @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} option.
1849
1850Normally the linker will generate an error message for each reported
1851unresolved symbol but the option @option{--warn-unresolved-symbols}
1852can change this to a warning.
1853
1854@kindex --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
1855@cindex verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
1856@item --dll-verbose
1857@itemx --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
1858Display the version number for @command{ld} and list the linker emulations
1859supported.  Display which input files can and cannot be opened.  Display
1860the linker script being used by the linker. If the optional @var{NUMBER}
1861argument > 1, plugin symbol status will also be displayed.
1862
1863@kindex --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
1864@cindex version script, symbol versions
1865@item --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
1866Specify the name of a version script to the linker.  This is typically
1867used when creating shared libraries to specify additional information
1868about the version hierarchy for the library being created.  This option
1869is only fully supported on ELF platforms which support shared libraries;
1870see @ref{VERSION}.  It is partially supported on PE platforms, which can
1871use version scripts to filter symbol visibility in auto-export mode: any
1872symbols marked @samp{local} in the version script will not be exported.
1873@xref{WIN32}.
1874
1875@kindex --warn-common
1876@cindex warnings, on combining symbols
1877@cindex combining symbols, warnings on
1878@item --warn-common
1879Warn when a common symbol is combined with another common symbol or with
1880a symbol definition.  Unix linkers allow this somewhat sloppy practise,
1881but linkers on some other operating systems do not.  This option allows
1882you to find potential problems from combining global symbols.
1883Unfortunately, some C libraries use this practise, so you may get some
1884warnings about symbols in the libraries as well as in your programs.
1885
1886There are three kinds of global symbols, illustrated here by C examples:
1887
1888@table @samp
1889@item int i = 1;
1890A definition, which goes in the initialized data section of the output
1891file.
1892
1893@item extern int i;
1894An undefined reference, which does not allocate space.
1895There must be either a definition or a common symbol for the
1896variable somewhere.
1897
1898@item int i;
1899A common symbol.  If there are only (one or more) common symbols for a
1900variable, it goes in the uninitialized data area of the output file.
1901The linker merges multiple common symbols for the same variable into a
1902single symbol.  If they are of different sizes, it picks the largest
1903size.  The linker turns a common symbol into a declaration, if there is
1904a definition of the same variable.
1905@end table
1906
1907The @samp{--warn-common} option can produce five kinds of warnings.
1908Each warning consists of a pair of lines: the first describes the symbol
1909just encountered, and the second describes the previous symbol
1910encountered with the same name.  One or both of the two symbols will be
1911a common symbol.
1912
1913@enumerate
1914@item
1915Turning a common symbol into a reference, because there is already a
1916definition for the symbol.
1917@smallexample
1918@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
1919   overridden by definition
1920@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: defined here
1921@end smallexample
1922
1923@item
1924Turning a common symbol into a reference, because a later definition for
1925the symbol is encountered.  This is the same as the previous case,
1926except that the symbols are encountered in a different order.
1927@smallexample
1928@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: definition of `@var{symbol}'
1929   overriding common
1930@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common is here
1931@end smallexample
1932
1933@item
1934Merging a common symbol with a previous same-sized common symbol.
1935@smallexample
1936@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: multiple common
1937   of `@var{symbol}'
1938@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: previous common is here
1939@end smallexample
1940
1941@item
1942Merging a common symbol with a previous larger common symbol.
1943@smallexample
1944@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
1945   overridden by larger common
1946@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: larger common is here
1947@end smallexample
1948
1949@item
1950Merging a common symbol with a previous smaller common symbol.  This is
1951the same as the previous case, except that the symbols are
1952encountered in a different order.
1953@smallexample
1954@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
1955   overriding smaller common
1956@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: smaller common is here
1957@end smallexample
1958@end enumerate
1959
1960@kindex --warn-constructors
1961@item --warn-constructors
1962Warn if any global constructors are used.  This is only useful for a few
1963object file formats.  For formats like COFF or ELF, the linker can not
1964detect the use of global constructors.
1965
1966@kindex --warn-multiple-gp
1967@item --warn-multiple-gp
1968Warn if multiple global pointer values are required in the output file.
1969This is only meaningful for certain processors, such as the Alpha.
1970Specifically, some processors put large-valued constants in a special
1971section.  A special register (the global pointer) points into the middle
1972of this section, so that constants can be loaded efficiently via a
1973base-register relative addressing mode.  Since the offset in
1974base-register relative mode is fixed and relatively small (e.g., 16
1975bits), this limits the maximum size of the constant pool.  Thus, in
1976large programs, it is often necessary to use multiple global pointer
1977values in order to be able to address all possible constants.  This
1978option causes a warning to be issued whenever this case occurs.
1979
1980@kindex --warn-once
1981@cindex warnings, on undefined symbols
1982@cindex undefined symbols, warnings on
1983@item --warn-once
1984Only warn once for each undefined symbol, rather than once per module
1985which refers to it.
1986
1987@kindex --warn-section-align
1988@cindex warnings, on section alignment
1989@cindex section alignment, warnings on
1990@item --warn-section-align
1991Warn if the address of an output section is changed because of
1992alignment.  Typically, the alignment will be set by an input section.
1993The address will only be changed if it not explicitly specified; that
1994is, if the @code{SECTIONS} command does not specify a start address for
1995the section (@pxref{SECTIONS}).
1996
1997@kindex --warn-shared-textrel
1998@item --warn-shared-textrel
1999Warn if the linker adds a DT_TEXTREL to a shared object.
2000
2001@kindex --warn-alternate-em
2002@item --warn-alternate-em
2003Warn if an object has alternate ELF machine code.
2004
2005@kindex --warn-unresolved-symbols
2006@item --warn-unresolved-symbols
2007If the linker is going to report an unresolved symbol (see the option
2008@option{--unresolved-symbols}) it will normally generate an error.
2009This option makes it generate a warning instead.
2010
2011@kindex --error-unresolved-symbols
2012@item --error-unresolved-symbols
2013This restores the linker's default behaviour of generating errors when
2014it is reporting unresolved symbols.
2015
2016@kindex --whole-archive
2017@cindex including an entire archive
2018@item --whole-archive
2019For each archive mentioned on the command line after the
2020@option{--whole-archive} option, include every object file in the archive
2021in the link, rather than searching the archive for the required object
2022files.  This is normally used to turn an archive file into a shared
2023library, forcing every object to be included in the resulting shared
2024library.  This option may be used more than once.
2025
2026Two notes when using this option from gcc: First, gcc doesn't know
2027about this option, so you have to use @option{-Wl,-whole-archive}.
2028Second, don't forget to use @option{-Wl,-no-whole-archive} after your
2029list of archives, because gcc will add its own list of archives to
2030your link and you may not want this flag to affect those as well.
2031
2032@kindex --wrap=@var{symbol}
2033@item --wrap=@var{symbol}
2034Use a wrapper function for @var{symbol}.  Any undefined reference to
2035@var{symbol} will be resolved to @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}.  Any
2036undefined reference to @code{__real_@var{symbol}} will be resolved to
2037@var{symbol}.
2038
2039This can be used to provide a wrapper for a system function.  The
2040wrapper function should be called @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}.  If it
2041wishes to call the system function, it should call
2042@code{__real_@var{symbol}}.
2043
2044Here is a trivial example:
2045
2046@smallexample
2047void *
2048__wrap_malloc (size_t c)
2049@{
2050  printf ("malloc called with %zu\n", c);
2051  return __real_malloc (c);
2052@}
2053@end smallexample
2054
2055If you link other code with this file using @option{--wrap malloc}, then
2056all calls to @code{malloc} will call the function @code{__wrap_malloc}
2057instead.  The call to @code{__real_malloc} in @code{__wrap_malloc} will
2058call the real @code{malloc} function.
2059
2060You may wish to provide a @code{__real_malloc} function as well, so that
2061links without the @option{--wrap} option will succeed.  If you do this,
2062you should not put the definition of @code{__real_malloc} in the same
2063file as @code{__wrap_malloc}; if you do, the assembler may resolve the
2064call before the linker has a chance to wrap it to @code{malloc}.
2065
2066@kindex --eh-frame-hdr
2067@item --eh-frame-hdr
2068Request creation of @code{.eh_frame_hdr} section and ELF
2069@code{PT_GNU_EH_FRAME} segment header.
2070
2071@kindex --enable-new-dtags
2072@kindex --disable-new-dtags
2073@item --enable-new-dtags
2074@itemx --disable-new-dtags
2075This linker can create the new dynamic tags in ELF. But the older ELF
2076systems may not understand them. If you specify
2077@option{--enable-new-dtags}, the dynamic tags will be created as needed.
2078If you specify @option{--disable-new-dtags}, no new dynamic tags will be
2079created. By default, the new dynamic tags are not created. Note that
2080those options are only available for ELF systems.
2081
2082@kindex --hash-size=@var{number}
2083@item --hash-size=@var{number}
2084Set the default size of the linker's hash tables to a prime number
2085close to @var{number}.  Increasing this value can reduce the length of
2086time it takes the linker to perform its tasks, at the expense of
2087increasing the linker's memory requirements.  Similarly reducing this
2088value can reduce the memory requirements at the expense of speed.
2089
2090@kindex --hash-style=@var{style}
2091@item --hash-style=@var{style}
2092Set the type of linker's hash table(s).  @var{style} can be either
2093@code{sysv} for classic ELF @code{.hash} section, @code{gnu} for
2094new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash} section or @code{both} for both
2095the classic ELF @code{.hash} and new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash}
2096hash tables.  The default is @code{sysv}.
2097
2098@kindex --reduce-memory-overheads
2099@item --reduce-memory-overheads
2100This option reduces memory requirements at ld runtime, at the expense of
2101linking speed.  This was introduced to select the old O(n^2) algorithm
2102for link map file generation, rather than the new O(n) algorithm which uses
2103about 40% more memory for symbol storage.
2104
2105Another effect of the switch is to set the default hash table size to
21061021, which again saves memory at the cost of lengthening the linker's
2107run time.  This is not done however if the @option{--hash-size} switch
2108has been used.
2109
2110The @option{--reduce-memory-overheads} switch may be also be used to
2111enable other tradeoffs in future versions of the linker.
2112
2113@kindex --build-id
2114@kindex --build-id=@var{style}
2115@item --build-id
2116@itemx --build-id=@var{style}
2117Request creation of @code{.note.gnu.build-id} ELF note section.
2118The contents of the note are unique bits identifying this linked
2119file.  @var{style} can be @code{uuid} to use 128 random bits,
2120@code{sha1} to use a 160-bit @sc{SHA1} hash on the normative
2121parts of the output contents, @code{md5} to use a 128-bit
2122@sc{MD5} hash on the normative parts of the output contents, or
2123@code{0x@var{hexstring}} to use a chosen bit string specified as
2124an even number of hexadecimal digits (@code{-} and @code{:}
2125characters between digit pairs are ignored).  If @var{style} is
2126omitted, @code{sha1} is used.
2127
2128The @code{md5} and @code{sha1} styles produces an identifier
2129that is always the same in an identical output file, but will be
2130unique among all nonidentical output files.  It is not intended
2131to be compared as a checksum for the file's contents.  A linked
2132file may be changed later by other tools, but the build ID bit
2133string identifying the original linked file does not change.
2134
2135Passing @code{none} for @var{style} disables the setting from any
2136@code{--build-id} options earlier on the command line.
2137@end table
2138
2139@c man end
2140
2141@subsection Options Specific to i386 PE Targets
2142
2143@c man begin OPTIONS
2144
2145The i386 PE linker supports the @option{-shared} option, which causes
2146the output to be a dynamically linked library (DLL) instead of a
2147normal executable.  You should name the output @code{*.dll} when you
2148use this option.  In addition, the linker fully supports the standard
2149@code{*.def} files, which may be specified on the linker command line
2150like an object file (in fact, it should precede archives it exports
2151symbols from, to ensure that they get linked in, just like a normal
2152object file).
2153
2154In addition to the options common to all targets, the i386 PE linker
2155support additional command line options that are specific to the i386
2156PE target.  Options that take values may be separated from their
2157values by either a space or an equals sign.
2158
2159@table @gcctabopt
2160
2161@kindex --add-stdcall-alias
2162@item --add-stdcall-alias
2163If given, symbols with a stdcall suffix (@@@var{nn}) will be exported
2164as-is and also with the suffix stripped.
2165[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2166
2167@kindex --base-file
2168@item --base-file @var{file}
2169Use @var{file} as the name of a file in which to save the base
2170addresses of all the relocations needed for generating DLLs with
2171@file{dlltool}.
2172[This is an i386 PE specific option]
2173
2174@kindex --dll
2175@item --dll
2176Create a DLL instead of a regular executable.  You may also use
2177@option{-shared} or specify a @code{LIBRARY} in a given @code{.def}
2178file.
2179[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2180
2181@kindex --enable-long-section-names
2182@kindex --disable-long-section-names
2183@item --enable-long-section-names
2184@itemx --disable-long-section-names
2185The PE variants of the Coff object format add an extension that permits
2186the use of section names longer than eight characters, the normal limit
2187for Coff.  By default, these names are only allowed in object files, as
2188fully-linked executable images do not carry the Coff string table required
2189to support the longer names.  As a GNU extension, it is possible to
2190allow their use in executable images as well, or to (probably pointlessly!)
2191disallow it in object files, by using these two options.  Executable images
2192generated with these long section names are slightly non-standard, carrying
2193as they do a string table, and may generate confusing output when examined
2194with non-GNU PE-aware tools, such as file viewers and dumpers.  However, 
2195GDB relies on the use of PE long section names to find Dwarf-2 debug 
2196information sections in an executable image at runtime, and so if neither
2197option is specified on the command-line, @command{ld} will enable long
2198section names, overriding the default and technically correct behaviour,
2199when it finds the presence of debug information while linking an executable
2200image and not stripping symbols.
2201[This option is valid for all PE targeted ports of the linker]
2202
2203@kindex --enable-stdcall-fixup
2204@kindex --disable-stdcall-fixup
2205@item --enable-stdcall-fixup
2206@itemx --disable-stdcall-fixup
2207If the link finds a symbol that it cannot resolve, it will attempt to
2208do ``fuzzy linking'' by looking for another defined symbol that differs
2209only in the format of the symbol name (cdecl vs stdcall) and will
2210resolve that symbol by linking to the match.  For example, the
2211undefined symbol @code{_foo} might be linked to the function
2212@code{_foo@@12}, or the undefined symbol @code{_bar@@16} might be linked
2213to the function @code{_bar}.  When the linker does this, it prints a
2214warning, since it normally should have failed to link, but sometimes
2215import libraries generated from third-party dlls may need this feature
2216to be usable.  If you specify @option{--enable-stdcall-fixup}, this
2217feature is fully enabled and warnings are not printed.  If you specify
2218@option{--disable-stdcall-fixup}, this feature is disabled and such
2219mismatches are considered to be errors.
2220[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2221
2222@kindex --leading-underscore
2223@kindex --no-leading-underscore
2224@item --leading-underscore
2225@itemx --no-leading-underscore
2226For most targets default symbol-prefix is an underscore and is defined
2227in target's description. By this option it is possible to
2228disable/enable the default underscore symbol-prefix.
2229
2230@cindex DLLs, creating
2231@kindex --export-all-symbols
2232@item --export-all-symbols
2233If given, all global symbols in the objects used to build a DLL will
2234be exported by the DLL.  Note that this is the default if there
2235otherwise wouldn't be any exported symbols.  When symbols are
2236explicitly exported via DEF files or implicitly exported via function
2237attributes, the default is to not export anything else unless this
2238option is given.  Note that the symbols @code{DllMain@@12},
2239@code{DllEntryPoint@@0}, @code{DllMainCRTStartup@@12}, and
2240@code{impure_ptr} will not be automatically
2241exported.  Also, symbols imported from other DLLs will not be
2242re-exported, nor will symbols specifying the DLL's internal layout
2243such as those beginning with @code{_head_} or ending with
2244@code{_iname}.  In addition, no symbols from @code{libgcc},
2245@code{libstd++}, @code{libmingw32}, or @code{crtX.o} will be exported.
2246Symbols whose names begin with @code{__rtti_} or @code{__builtin_} will
2247not be exported, to help with C++ DLLs.  Finally, there is an
2248extensive list of cygwin-private symbols that are not exported
2249(obviously, this applies on when building DLLs for cygwin targets).
2250These cygwin-excludes are: @code{_cygwin_dll_entry@@12},
2251@code{_cygwin_crt0_common@@8}, @code{_cygwin_noncygwin_dll_entry@@12},
2252@code{_fmode}, @code{_impure_ptr}, @code{cygwin_attach_dll},
2253@code{cygwin_premain0}, @code{cygwin_premain1}, @code{cygwin_premain2},
2254@code{cygwin_premain3}, and @code{environ}.
2255[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2256
2257@kindex --exclude-symbols
2258@item --exclude-symbols @var{symbol},@var{symbol},...
2259Specifies a list of symbols which should not be automatically
2260exported.  The symbol names may be delimited by commas or colons.
2261[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2262
2263@kindex --exclude-all-symbols
2264@item --exclude-all-symbols
2265Specifies no symbols should be automatically exported.
2266[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2267
2268@kindex --file-alignment
2269@item --file-alignment
2270Specify the file alignment.  Sections in the file will always begin at
2271file offsets which are multiples of this number.  This defaults to
2272512.
2273[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2274
2275@cindex heap size
2276@kindex --heap
2277@item --heap @var{reserve}
2278@itemx --heap @var{reserve},@var{commit}
2279Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
2280to be used as heap for this program.  The default is 1Mb reserved, 4K
2281committed.
2282[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2283
2284@cindex image base
2285@kindex --image-base
2286@item --image-base @var{value}
2287Use @var{value} as the base address of your program or dll.  This is
2288the lowest memory location that will be used when your program or dll
2289is loaded.  To reduce the need to relocate and improve performance of
2290your dlls, each should have a unique base address and not overlap any
2291other dlls.  The default is 0x400000 for executables, and 0x10000000
2292for dlls.
2293[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2294
2295@kindex --kill-at
2296@item --kill-at
2297If given, the stdcall suffixes (@@@var{nn}) will be stripped from
2298symbols before they are exported.
2299[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2300
2301@kindex --large-address-aware
2302@item --large-address-aware
2303If given, the appropriate bit in the ``Characteristics'' field of the COFF
2304header is set to indicate that this executable supports virtual addresses
2305greater than 2 gigabytes.  This should be used in conjunction with the /3GB
2306or /USERVA=@var{value} megabytes switch in the ``[operating systems]''
2307section of the BOOT.INI.  Otherwise, this bit has no effect.
2308[This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2309
2310@kindex --major-image-version
2311@item --major-image-version @var{value}
2312Sets the major number of the ``image version''.  Defaults to 1.
2313[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2314
2315@kindex --major-os-version
2316@item --major-os-version @var{value}
2317Sets the major number of the ``os version''.  Defaults to 4.
2318[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2319
2320@kindex --major-subsystem-version
2321@item --major-subsystem-version @var{value}
2322Sets the major number of the ``subsystem version''.  Defaults to 4.
2323[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2324
2325@kindex --minor-image-version
2326@item --minor-image-version @var{value}
2327Sets the minor number of the ``image version''.  Defaults to 0.
2328[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2329
2330@kindex --minor-os-version
2331@item --minor-os-version @var{value}
2332Sets the minor number of the ``os version''.  Defaults to 0.
2333[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2334
2335@kindex --minor-subsystem-version
2336@item --minor-subsystem-version @var{value}
2337Sets the minor number of the ``subsystem version''.  Defaults to 0.
2338[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2339
2340@cindex DEF files, creating
2341@cindex DLLs, creating
2342@kindex --output-def
2343@item --output-def @var{file}
2344The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain a DEF
2345file corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating.  This DEF file
2346(which should be called @code{*.def}) may be used to create an import
2347library with @code{dlltool} or may be used as a reference to
2348automatically or implicitly exported symbols.
2349[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2350
2351@cindex DLLs, creating
2352@kindex --out-implib
2353@item --out-implib @var{file}
2354The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain an
2355import lib corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This
2356import lib (which should be called @code{*.dll.a} or @code{*.a}
2357may be used to link clients against the generated DLL; this behaviour
2358makes it possible to skip a separate @code{dlltool} import library
2359creation step.
2360[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2361
2362@kindex --enable-auto-image-base
2363@item --enable-auto-image-base
2364Automatically choose the image base for DLLs, unless one is specified
2365using the @code{--image-base} argument.  By using a hash generated
2366from the dllname to create unique image bases for each DLL, in-memory
2367collisions and relocations which can delay program execution are
2368avoided.
2369[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2370
2371@kindex --disable-auto-image-base
2372@item --disable-auto-image-base
2373Do not automatically generate a unique image base.  If there is no
2374user-specified image base (@code{--image-base}) then use the platform
2375default.
2376[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2377
2378@cindex DLLs, linking to
2379@kindex --dll-search-prefix
2380@item --dll-search-prefix @var{string}
2381When linking dynamically to a dll without an import library,
2382search for @code{<string><basename>.dll} in preference to
2383@code{lib<basename>.dll}. This behaviour allows easy distinction
2384between DLLs built for the various "subplatforms": native, cygwin,
2385uwin, pw, etc.  For instance, cygwin DLLs typically use
2386@code{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}.
2387[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2388
2389@kindex --enable-auto-import
2390@item --enable-auto-import
2391Do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to @code{__imp__symbol} for
2392DATA imports from DLLs, and create the necessary thunking symbols when
2393building the import libraries with those DATA exports. Note: Use of the
2394'auto-import' extension will cause the text section of the image file
2395to be made writable. This does not conform to the PE-COFF format
2396specification published by Microsoft.
2397
2398Note - use of the 'auto-import' extension will also cause read only
2399data which would normally be placed into the .rdata section to be
2400placed into the .data section instead.  This is in order to work
2401around a problem with consts that is described here:
2402http://www.cygwin.com/ml/cygwin/2004-09/msg01101.html
2403
2404Using 'auto-import' generally will 'just work' -- but sometimes you may
2405see this message:
2406
2407"variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
2408documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
2409
2410This message occurs when some (sub)expression accesses an address
2411ultimately given by the sum of two constants (Win32 import tables only
2412allow one).  Instances where this may occur include accesses to member
2413fields of struct variables imported from a DLL, as well as using a
2414constant index into an array variable imported from a DLL.  Any
2415multiword variable (arrays, structs, long long, etc) may trigger
2416this error condition.  However, regardless of the exact data type
2417of the offending exported variable, ld will always detect it, issue
2418the warning, and exit.
2419
2420There are several ways to address this difficulty, regardless of the
2421data type of the exported variable:
2422
2423One way is to use --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc switch. This leaves the task
2424of adjusting references in your client code for runtime environment, so
2425this method works only when runtime environment supports this feature.
2426
2427A second solution is to force one of the 'constants' to be a variable --
2428that is, unknown and un-optimizable at compile time.  For arrays,
2429there are two possibilities: a) make the indexee (the array's address)
2430a variable, or b) make the 'constant' index a variable.  Thus:
2431
2432@example
2433extern type extern_array[];
2434extern_array[1] -->
2435   @{ volatile type *t=extern_array; t[1] @}
2436@end example
2437
2438or
2439
2440@example
2441extern type extern_array[];
2442extern_array[1] -->
2443   @{ volatile int t=1; extern_array[t] @}
2444@end example
2445
2446For structs (and most other multiword data types) the only option
2447is to make the struct itself (or the long long, or the ...) variable:
2448
2449@example
2450extern struct s extern_struct;
2451extern_struct.field -->
2452   @{ volatile struct s *t=&extern_struct; t->field @}
2453@end example
2454
2455or
2456
2457@example
2458extern long long extern_ll;
2459extern_ll -->
2460  @{ volatile long long * local_ll=&extern_ll; *local_ll @}
2461@end example
2462
2463A third method of dealing with this difficulty is to abandon
2464'auto-import' for the offending symbol and mark it with
2465@code{__declspec(dllimport)}.  However, in practise that
2466requires using compile-time #defines to indicate whether you are
2467building a DLL, building client code that will link to the DLL, or
2468merely building/linking to a static library.   In making the choice
2469between the various methods of resolving the 'direct address with
2470constant offset' problem, you should consider typical real-world usage:
2471
2472Original:
2473@example
2474--foo.h
2475extern int arr[];
2476--foo.c
2477#include "foo.h"
2478void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2479  printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2480@}
2481@end example
2482
2483Solution 1:
2484@example
2485--foo.h
2486extern int arr[];
2487--foo.c
2488#include "foo.h"
2489void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2490  /* This workaround is for win32 and cygwin; do not "optimize" */
2491  volatile int *parr = arr;
2492  printf("%d\n",parr[1]);
2493@}
2494@end example
2495
2496Solution 2:
2497@example
2498--foo.h
2499/* Note: auto-export is assumed (no __declspec(dllexport)) */
2500#if (defined(_WIN32) || defined(__CYGWIN__)) && \
2501  !(defined(FOO_BUILD_DLL) || defined(FOO_STATIC))
2502#define FOO_IMPORT __declspec(dllimport)
2503#else
2504#define FOO_IMPORT
2505#endif
2506extern FOO_IMPORT int arr[];
2507--foo.c
2508#include "foo.h"
2509void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2510  printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2511@}
2512@end example
2513
2514A fourth way to avoid this problem is to re-code your
2515library to use a functional interface rather than a data interface
2516for the offending variables (e.g. set_foo() and get_foo() accessor
2517functions).
2518[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2519
2520@kindex --disable-auto-import
2521@item --disable-auto-import
2522Do not attempt to do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to
2523@code{__imp__symbol} for DATA imports from DLLs.
2524[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2525
2526@kindex --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2527@item --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2528If your code contains expressions described in --enable-auto-import section,
2529that is, DATA imports from DLL with non-zero offset, this switch will create
2530a vector of 'runtime pseudo relocations' which can be used by runtime
2531environment to adjust references to such data in your client code.
2532[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2533
2534@kindex --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2535@item --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2536Do not create pseudo relocations for non-zero offset DATA imports from
2537DLLs.  This is the default.
2538[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2539
2540@kindex --enable-extra-pe-debug
2541@item --enable-extra-pe-debug
2542Show additional debug info related to auto-import symbol thunking.
2543[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2544
2545@kindex --section-alignment
2546@item --section-alignment
2547Sets the section alignment.  Sections in memory will always begin at
2548addresses which are a multiple of this number.  Defaults to 0x1000.
2549[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2550
2551@cindex stack size
2552@kindex --stack
2553@item --stack @var{reserve}
2554@itemx --stack @var{reserve},@var{commit}
2555Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
2556to be used as stack for this program.  The default is 2Mb reserved, 4K
2557committed.
2558[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2559
2560@kindex --subsystem
2561@item --subsystem @var{which}
2562@itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}
2563@itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}.@var{minor}
2564Specifies the subsystem under which your program will execute.  The
2565legal values for @var{which} are @code{native}, @code{windows},
2566@code{console}, @code{posix}, and @code{xbox}.  You may optionally set
2567the subsystem version also.  Numeric values are also accepted for
2568@var{which}.
2569[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2570
2571The following options set flags in the @code{DllCharacteristics} field
2572of the PE file header:
2573[These options are specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2574
2575@kindex --dynamicbase
2576@item --dynamicbase
2577The image base address may be relocated using address space layout
2578randomization (ASLR).  This feature was introduced with MS Windows
2579Vista for i386 PE targets.
2580
2581@kindex --forceinteg
2582@item --forceinteg
2583Code integrity checks are enforced.
2584
2585@kindex --nxcompat
2586@item --nxcompat
2587The image is compatible with the Data Execution Prevention.
2588This feature was introduced with MS Windows XP SP2 for i386 PE targets.
2589
2590@kindex --no-isolation
2591@item --no-isolation
2592Although the image understands isolation, do not isolate the image.
2593
2594@kindex --no-seh
2595@item --no-seh
2596The image does not use SEH. No SE handler may be called from
2597this image.
2598
2599@kindex --no-bind
2600@item --no-bind
2601Do not bind this image.
2602
2603@kindex --wdmdriver
2604@item --wdmdriver
2605The driver uses the MS Windows Driver Model.
2606 
2607@kindex --tsaware
2608@item --tsaware
2609The image is Terminal Server aware.
2610
2611@end table
2612
2613@c man end
2614
2615@ifset M68HC11
2616@subsection Options specific to Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 targets
2617
2618@c man begin OPTIONS
2619
2620The 68HC11 and 68HC12 linkers support specific options to control the
2621memory bank switching mapping and trampoline code generation.
2622
2623@table @gcctabopt
2624
2625@kindex --no-trampoline
2626@item --no-trampoline
2627This option disables the generation of trampoline. By default a trampoline
2628is generated for each far function which is called using a @code{jsr}
2629instruction (this happens when a pointer to a far function is taken).
2630
2631@kindex --bank-window
2632@item --bank-window @var{name}
2633This option indicates to the linker the name of the memory region in
2634the @samp{MEMORY} specification that describes the memory bank window.
2635The definition of such region is then used by the linker to compute
2636paging and addresses within the memory window.
2637
2638@end table
2639
2640@c man end
2641@end ifset
2642
2643@ifset M68K
2644@subsection Options specific to Motorola 68K target
2645
2646@c man begin OPTIONS
2647
2648The following options are supported to control handling of GOT generation
2649when linking for 68K targets.
2650
2651@table @gcctabopt
2652
2653@kindex --got
2654@item --got=@var{type}
2655This option tells the linker which GOT generation scheme to use.
2656@var{type} should be one of @samp{single}, @samp{negative},
2657@samp{multigot} or @samp{target}.  For more information refer to the
2658Info entry for @file{ld}.
2659
2660@end table
2661
2662@c man end
2663@end ifset
2664
2665@ifset UsesEnvVars
2666@node Environment
2667@section Environment Variables
2668
2669@c man begin ENVIRONMENT
2670
2671You can change the behaviour of @command{ld} with the environment variables
2672@ifclear SingleFormat
2673@code{GNUTARGET},
2674@end ifclear
2675@code{LDEMULATION} and @code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}.
2676
2677@ifclear SingleFormat
2678@kindex GNUTARGET
2679@cindex default input format
2680@code{GNUTARGET} determines the input-file object format if you don't
2681use @samp{-b} (or its synonym @samp{--format}).  Its value should be one
2682of the BFD names for an input format (@pxref{BFD}).  If there is no
2683@code{GNUTARGET} in the environment, @command{ld} uses the natural format
2684of the target. If @code{GNUTARGET} is set to @code{default} then BFD
2685attempts to discover the input format by examining binary input files;
2686this method often succeeds, but there are potential ambiguities, since
2687there is no method of ensuring that the magic number used to specify
2688object-file formats is unique.  However, the configuration procedure for
2689BFD on each system places the conventional format for that system first
2690in the search-list, so ambiguities are resolved in favor of convention.
2691@end ifclear
2692
2693@kindex LDEMULATION
2694@cindex default emulation
2695@cindex emulation, default
2696@code{LDEMULATION} determines the default emulation if you don't use the
2697@samp{-m} option.  The emulation can affect various aspects of linker
2698behaviour, particularly the default linker script.  You can list the
2699available emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options.  If
2700the @samp{-m} option is not used, and the @code{LDEMULATION} environment
2701variable is not defined, the default emulation depends upon how the
2702linker was configured.
2703
2704@kindex COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE
2705@cindex demangling, default
2706Normally, the linker will default to demangling symbols.  However, if
2707@code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE} is set in the environment, then it will
2708default to not demangling symbols.  This environment variable is used in
2709a similar fashion by the @code{gcc} linker wrapper program.  The default
2710may be overridden by the @samp{--demangle} and @samp{--no-demangle}
2711options.
2712
2713@c man end
2714@end ifset
2715
2716@node Scripts
2717@chapter Linker Scripts
2718
2719@cindex scripts
2720@cindex linker scripts
2721@cindex command files
2722Every link is controlled by a @dfn{linker script}.  This script is
2723written in the linker command language.
2724
2725The main purpose of the linker script is to describe how the sections in
2726the input files should be mapped into the output file, and to control
2727the memory layout of the output file.  Most linker scripts do nothing
2728more than this.  However, when necessary, the linker script can also
2729direct the linker to perform many other operations, using the commands
2730described below.
2731
2732The linker always uses a linker script.  If you do not supply one
2733yourself, the linker will use a default script that is compiled into the
2734linker executable.  You can use the @samp{--verbose} command line option
2735to display the default linker script.  Certain command line options,
2736such as @samp{-r} or @samp{-N}, will affect the default linker script.
2737
2738You may supply your own linker script by using the @samp{-T} command
2739line option.  When you do this, your linker script will replace the
2740default linker script.
2741
2742You may also use linker scripts implicitly by naming them as input files
2743to the linker, as though they were files to be linked.  @xref{Implicit
2744Linker Scripts}.
2745
2746@menu
2747* Basic Script Concepts::	Basic Linker Script Concepts
2748* Script Format::		Linker Script Format
2749* Simple Example::		Simple Linker Script Example
2750* Simple Commands::		Simple Linker Script Commands
2751* Assignments::			Assigning Values to Symbols
2752* SECTIONS::			SECTIONS Command
2753* MEMORY::			MEMORY Command
2754* PHDRS::			PHDRS Command
2755* VERSION::			VERSION Command
2756* Expressions::			Expressions in Linker Scripts
2757* Implicit Linker Scripts::	Implicit Linker Scripts
2758@end menu
2759
2760@node Basic Script Concepts
2761@section Basic Linker Script Concepts
2762@cindex linker script concepts
2763We need to define some basic concepts and vocabulary in order to
2764describe the linker script language.
2765
2766The linker combines input files into a single output file.  The output
2767file and each input file are in a special data format known as an
2768@dfn{object file format}.  Each file is called an @dfn{object file}.
2769The output file is often called an @dfn{executable}, but for our
2770purposes we will also call it an object file.  Each object file has,
2771among other things, a list of @dfn{sections}.  We sometimes refer to a
2772section in an input file as an @dfn{input section}; similarly, a section
2773in the output file is an @dfn{output section}.
2774
2775Each section in an object file has a name and a size.  Most sections
2776also have an associated block of data, known as the @dfn{section
2777contents}.  A section may be marked as @dfn{loadable}, which mean that
2778the contents should be loaded into memory when the output file is run.
2779A section with no contents may be @dfn{allocatable}, which means that an
2780area in memory should be set aside, but nothing in particular should be
2781loaded there (in some cases this memory must be zeroed out).  A section
2782which is neither loadable nor allocatable typically contains some sort
2783of debugging information.
2784
2785Every loadable or allocatable output section has two addresses.  The
2786first is the @dfn{VMA}, or virtual memory address.  This is the address
2787the section will have when the output file is run.  The second is the
2788@dfn{LMA}, or load memory address.  This is the address at which the
2789section will be loaded.  In most cases the two addresses will be the
2790same.  An example of when they might be different is when a data section
2791is loaded into ROM, and then copied into RAM when the program starts up
2792(this technique is often used to initialize global variables in a ROM
2793based system).  In this case the ROM address would be the LMA, and the
2794RAM address would be the VMA.
2795
2796You can see the sections in an object file by using the @code{objdump}
2797program with the @samp{-h} option.
2798
2799Every object file also has a list of @dfn{symbols}, known as the
2800@dfn{symbol table}.  A symbol may be defined or undefined.  Each symbol
2801has a name, and each defined symbol has an address, among other
2802information.  If you compile a C or C++ program into an object file, you
2803will get a defined symbol for every defined function and global or
2804static variable.  Every undefined function or global variable which is
2805referenced in the input file will become an undefined symbol.
2806
2807You can see the symbols in an object file by using the @code{nm}
2808program, or by using the @code{objdump} program with the @samp{-t}
2809option.
2810
2811@node Script Format
2812@section Linker Script Format
2813@cindex linker script format
2814Linker scripts are text files.
2815
2816You write a linker script as a series of commands.  Each command is
2817either a keyword, possibly followed by arguments, or an assignment to a
2818symbol.  You may separate commands using semicolons.  Whitespace is
2819generally ignored.
2820
2821Strings such as file or format names can normally be entered directly.
2822If the file name contains a character such as a comma which would
2823otherwise serve to separate file names, you may put the file name in
2824double quotes.  There is no way to use a double quote character in a
2825file name.
2826
2827You may include comments in linker scripts just as in C, delimited by
2828@samp{/*} and @samp{*/}.  As in C, comments are syntactically equivalent
2829to whitespace.
2830
2831@node Simple Example
2832@section Simple Linker Script Example
2833@cindex linker script example
2834@cindex example of linker script
2835Many linker scripts are fairly simple.
2836
2837The simplest possible linker script has just one command:
2838@samp{SECTIONS}.  You use the @samp{SECTIONS} command to describe the
2839memory layout of the output file.
2840
2841The @samp{SECTIONS} command is a powerful command.  Here we will
2842describe a simple use of it.  Let's assume your program consists only of
2843code, initialized data, and uninitialized data.  These will be in the
2844@samp{.text}, @samp{.data}, and @samp{.bss} sections, respectively.
2845Let's assume further that these are the only sections which appear in
2846your input files.
2847
2848For this example, let's say that the code should be loaded at address
28490x10000, and that the data should start at address 0x8000000.  Here is a
2850linker script which will do that:
2851@smallexample
2852SECTIONS
2853@{
2854  . = 0x10000;
2855  .text : @{ *(.text) @}
2856  . = 0x8000000;
2857  .data : @{ *(.data) @}
2858  .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
2859@}
2860@end smallexample
2861
2862You write the @samp{SECTIONS} command as the keyword @samp{SECTIONS},
2863followed by a series of symbol assignments and output section
2864descriptions enclosed in curly braces.
2865
2866The first line inside the @samp{SECTIONS} command of the above example
2867sets the value of the special symbol @samp{.}, which is the location
2868counter.  If you do not specify the address of an output section in some
2869other way (other ways are described later), the address is set from the
2870current value of the location counter.  The location counter is then
2871incremented by the size of the output section.  At the start of the
2872@samp{SECTIONS} command, the location counter has the value @samp{0}.
2873
2874The second line defines an output section, @samp{.text}.  The colon is
2875required syntax which may be ignored for now.  Within the curly braces
2876after the output section name, you list the names of the input sections
2877which should be placed into this output section.  The @samp{*} is a
2878wildcard which matches any file name.  The expression @samp{*(.text)}
2879means all @samp{.text} input sections in all input files.
2880
2881Since the location counter is @samp{0x10000} when the output section
2882@samp{.text} is defined, the linker will set the address of the
2883@samp{.text} section in the output file to be @samp{0x10000}.
2884
2885The remaining lines define the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss} sections in
2886the output file.  The linker will place the @samp{.data} output section
2887at address @samp{0x8000000}.  After the linker places the @samp{.data}
2888output section, the value of the location counter will be
2889@samp{0x8000000} plus the size of the @samp{.data} output section.  The
2890effect is that the linker will place the @samp{.bss} output section
2891immediately after the @samp{.data} output section in memory.
2892
2893The linker will ensure that each output section has the required
2894alignment, by increasing the location counter if necessary.  In this
2895example, the specified addresses for the @samp{.text} and @samp{.data}
2896sections will probably satisfy any alignment constraints, but the linker
2897may have to create a small gap between the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss}
2898sections.
2899
2900That's it!  That's a simple and complete linker script.
2901
2902@node Simple Commands
2903@section Simple Linker Script Commands
2904@cindex linker script simple commands
2905In this section we describe the simple linker script commands.
2906
2907@menu
2908* Entry Point::			Setting the entry point
2909* File Commands::		Commands dealing with files
2910@ifclear SingleFormat
2911* Format Commands::		Commands dealing with object file formats
2912@end ifclear
2913
2914* REGION_ALIAS::		Assign alias names to memory regions
2915* Miscellaneous Commands::	Other linker script commands
2916@end menu
2917
2918@node Entry Point
2919@subsection Setting the Entry Point
2920@kindex ENTRY(@var{symbol})
2921@cindex start of execution
2922@cindex first instruction
2923@cindex entry point
2924The first instruction to execute in a program is called the @dfn{entry
2925point}.  You can use the @code{ENTRY} linker script command to set the
2926entry point.  The argument is a symbol name:
2927@smallexample
2928ENTRY(@var{symbol})
2929@end smallexample
2930
2931There are several ways to set the entry point.  The linker will set the
2932entry point by trying each of the following methods in order, and
2933stopping when one of them succeeds:
2934@itemize @bullet
2935@item
2936the @samp{-e} @var{entry} command-line option;
2937@item
2938the @code{ENTRY(@var{symbol})} command in a linker script;
2939@item
2940the value of a target specific symbol, if it is defined;  For many
2941targets this is @code{start}, but PE and BeOS based systems for example
2942check a list of possible entry symbols, matching the first one found.
2943@item
2944the address of the first byte of the @samp{.text} section, if present;
2945@item
2946The address @code{0}.
2947@end itemize
2948
2949@node File Commands
2950@subsection Commands Dealing with Files
2951@cindex linker script file commands
2952Several linker script commands deal with files.
2953
2954@table @code
2955@item INCLUDE @var{filename}
2956@kindex INCLUDE @var{filename}
2957@cindex including a linker script
2958Include the linker script @var{filename} at this point.  The file will
2959be searched for in the current directory, and in any directory specified
2960with the @option{-L} option.  You can nest calls to @code{INCLUDE} up to
296110 levels deep.
2962
2963You can place @code{INCLUDE} directives at the top level, in @code{MEMORY} or
2964@code{SECTIONS} commands, or in output section descriptions.
2965
2966@item INPUT(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
2967@itemx INPUT(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
2968@kindex INPUT(@var{files})
2969@cindex input files in linker scripts
2970@cindex input object files in linker scripts
2971@cindex linker script input object files
2972The @code{INPUT} command directs the linker to include the named files
2973in the link, as though they were named on the command line.
2974
2975For example, if you always want to include @file{subr.o} any time you do
2976a link, but you can't be bothered to put it on every link command line,
2977then you can put @samp{INPUT (subr.o)} in your linker script.
2978
2979In fact, if you like, you can list all of your input files in the linker
2980script, and then invoke the linker with nothing but a @samp{-T} option.
2981
2982In case a @dfn{sysroot prefix} is configured, and the filename starts
2983with the @samp{/} character, and the script being processed was
2984located inside the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, the filename will be looked
2985for in the @dfn{sysroot prefix}.  Otherwise, the linker will try to
2986open the file in the current directory.  If it is not found, the
2987linker will search through the archive library search path.  See the
2988description of @samp{-L} in @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
2989
2990If you use @samp{INPUT (-l@var{file})}, @command{ld} will transform the
2991name to @code{lib@var{file}.a}, as with the command line argument
2992@samp{-l}.
2993
2994When you use the @code{INPUT} command in an implicit linker script, the
2995files will be included in the link at the point at which the linker
2996script file is included.  This can affect archive searching.
2997
2998@item GROUP(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
2999@itemx GROUP(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3000@kindex GROUP(@var{files})
3001@cindex grouping input files
3002The @code{GROUP} command is like @code{INPUT}, except that the named
3003files should all be archives, and they are searched repeatedly until no
3004new undefined references are created.  See the description of @samp{-(}
3005in @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
3006
3007@item AS_NEEDED(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3008@itemx AS_NEEDED(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3009@kindex AS_NEEDED(@var{files})
3010This construct can appear only inside of the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP}
3011commands, among other filenames.  The files listed will be handled
3012as if they appear directly in the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} commands,
3013with the exception of ELF shared libraries, that will be added only
3014when they are actually needed.  This construct essentially enables
3015@option{--as-needed} option for all the files listed inside of it
3016and restores previous @option{--as-needed} resp. @option{--no-as-needed}
3017setting afterwards.
3018
3019@item OUTPUT(@var{filename})
3020@kindex OUTPUT(@var{filename})
3021@cindex output file name in linker script
3022The @code{OUTPUT} command names the output file.  Using
3023@code{OUTPUT(@var{filename})} in the linker script is exactly like using
3024@samp{-o @var{filename}} on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command
3025Line Options}).  If both are used, the command line option takes
3026precedence.
3027
3028You can use the @code{OUTPUT} command to define a default name for the
3029output file other than the usual default of @file{a.out}.
3030
3031@item SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3032@kindex SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3033@cindex library search path in linker script
3034@cindex archive search path in linker script
3035@cindex search path in linker script
3036The @code{SEARCH_DIR} command adds @var{path} to the list of paths where
3037@command{ld} looks for archive libraries.  Using
3038@code{SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})} is exactly like using @samp{-L @var{path}}
3039on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}).  If both
3040are used, then the linker will search both paths.  Paths specified using
3041the command line option are searched first.
3042
3043@item STARTUP(@var{filename})
3044@kindex STARTUP(@var{filename})
3045@cindex first input file
3046The @code{STARTUP} command is just like the @code{INPUT} command, except
3047that @var{filename} will become the first input file to be linked, as
3048though it were specified first on the command line.  This may be useful
3049when using a system in which the entry point is always the start of the
3050first file.
3051@end table
3052
3053@ifclear SingleFormat
3054@node Format Commands
3055@subsection Commands Dealing with Object File Formats
3056A couple of linker script commands deal with object file formats.
3057
3058@table @code
3059@item OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3060@itemx OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{default}, @var{big}, @var{little})
3061@kindex OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3062@cindex output file format in linker script
3063The @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command names the BFD format to use for the
3064output file (@pxref{BFD}).  Using @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})} is
3065exactly like using @samp{--oformat @var{bfdname}} on the command line
3066(@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}).  If both are used, the command
3067line option takes precedence.
3068
3069You can use @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} with three arguments to use different
3070formats based on the @samp{-EB} and @samp{-EL} command line options.
3071This permits the linker script to set the output format based on the
3072desired endianness.
3073
3074If neither @samp{-EB} nor @samp{-EL} are used, then the output format
3075will be the first argument, @var{default}.  If @samp{-EB} is used, the
3076output format will be the second argument, @var{big}.  If @samp{-EL} is
3077used, the output format will be the third argument, @var{little}.
3078
3079For example, the default linker script for the MIPS ELF target uses this
3080command:
3081@smallexample
3082OUTPUT_FORMAT(elf32-bigmips, elf32-bigmips, elf32-littlemips)
3083@end smallexample
3084This says that the default format for the output file is
3085@samp{elf32-bigmips}, but if the user uses the @samp{-EL} command line
3086option, the output file will be created in the @samp{elf32-littlemips}
3087format.
3088
3089@item TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3090@kindex TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3091@cindex input file format in linker script
3092The @code{TARGET} command names the BFD format to use when reading input
3093files.  It affects subsequent @code{INPUT} and @code{GROUP} commands.
3094This command is like using @samp{-b @var{bfdname}} on the command line
3095(@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}).  If the @code{TARGET} command
3096is used but @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} is not, then the last @code{TARGET}
3097command is also used to set the format for the output file.  @xref{BFD}.
3098@end table
3099@end ifclear
3100
3101@node REGION_ALIAS
3102@subsection Assign alias names to memory regions
3103@kindex REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3104@cindex region alias
3105@cindex region names
3106
3107Alias names can be added to existing memory regions created with the
3108@ref{MEMORY} command.  Each name corresponds to at most one memory region.
3109
3110@smallexample
3111REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3112@end smallexample
3113
3114The @code{REGION_ALIAS} function creates an alias name @var{alias} for the
3115memory region @var{region}.  This allows a flexible mapping of output sections
3116to memory regions.  An example follows.
3117
3118Suppose we have an application for embedded systems which come with various
3119memory storage devices.  All have a general purpose, volatile memory @code{RAM}
3120that allows code execution or data storage.  Some may have a read-only,
3121non-volatile memory @code{ROM} that allows code execution and read-only data
3122access.  The last variant is a read-only, non-volatile memory @code{ROM2} with
3123read-only data access and no code execution capability.  We have four output
3124sections:
3125
3126@itemize @bullet
3127@item
3128@code{.text} program code;
3129@item
3130@code{.rodata} read-only data;
3131@item
3132@code{.data} read-write initialized data;
3133@item
3134@code{.bss} read-write zero initialized data.
3135@end itemize
3136
3137The goal is to provide a linker command file that contains a system independent
3138part defining the output sections and a system dependent part mapping the
3139output sections to the memory regions available on the system.  Our embedded
3140systems come with three different memory setups @code{A}, @code{B} and
3141@code{C}:
3142@multitable @columnfractions .25 .25 .25 .25
3143@item Section @tab Variant A @tab Variant B @tab Variant C
3144@item .text @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM 
3145@item .rodata @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM2
3146@item .data @tab RAM @tab RAM/ROM @tab RAM/ROM2
3147@item .bss @tab RAM @tab RAM @tab RAM
3148@end multitable
3149The notation @code{RAM/ROM} or @code{RAM/ROM2} means that this section is
3150loaded into region @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} respectively.  Please note that
3151the load address of the @code{.data} section starts in all three variants at
3152the end of the @code{.rodata} section.
3153
3154The base linker script that deals with the output sections follows.  It
3155includes the system dependent @code{linkcmds.memory} file that describes the
3156memory layout:
3157@smallexample
3158INCLUDE linkcmds.memory
3159
3160SECTIONS
3161  @{
3162    .text :
3163      @{
3164        *(.text)
3165      @} > REGION_TEXT
3166    .rodata :
3167      @{
3168        *(.rodata)
3169        rodata_end = .;
3170      @} > REGION_RODATA
3171    .data : AT (rodata_end)
3172      @{
3173        data_start = .;
3174        *(.data)
3175      @} > REGION_DATA
3176    data_size = SIZEOF(.data);
3177    data_load_start = LOADADDR(.data);
3178    .bss :
3179      @{
3180        *(.bss)
3181      @} > REGION_BSS
3182  @}
3183@end smallexample
3184
3185Now we need three different @code{linkcmds.memory} files to define memory
3186regions and alias names.  The content of @code{linkcmds.memory} for the three
3187variants @code{A}, @code{B} and @code{C}:
3188@table @code
3189@item A
3190Here everything goes into the @code{RAM}.
3191@smallexample
3192MEMORY
3193  @{
3194    RAM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 4M
3195  @}
3196
3197REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", RAM);
3198REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", RAM);
3199REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3200REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3201@end smallexample
3202@item B
3203Program code and read-only data go into the @code{ROM}.  Read-write data goes
3204into the @code{RAM}.  An image of the initialized data is loaded into the
3205@code{ROM} and will be copied during system start into the @code{RAM}.
3206@smallexample
3207MEMORY
3208  @{
3209    ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 3M
3210    RAM : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3211  @}
3212
3213REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3214REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM);
3215REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3216REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3217@end smallexample
3218@item C
3219Program code goes into the @code{ROM}.  Read-only data goes into the
3220@code{ROM2}.  Read-write data goes into the @code{RAM}.  An image of the
3221initialized data is loaded into the @code{ROM2} and will be copied during
3222system start into the @code{RAM}.
3223@smallexample
3224MEMORY
3225  @{
3226    ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 2M
3227    ROM2 : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3228    RAM : ORIGIN = 0x20000000, LENGTH = 1M
3229  @}
3230
3231REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3232REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM2);
3233REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3234REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3235@end smallexample
3236@end table
3237
3238It is possible to write a common system initialization routine to copy the
3239@code{.data} section from @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} into the @code{RAM} if
3240necessary:
3241@smallexample
3242#include <string.h>
3243
3244extern char data_start [];
3245extern char data_size [];
3246extern char data_load_start [];
3247
3248void copy_data(void)
3249@{
3250  if (data_start != data_load_start)
3251    @{
3252      memcpy(data_start, data_load_start, (size_t) data_size);
3253    @}
3254@}
3255@end smallexample
3256
3257@node Miscellaneous Commands
3258@subsection Other Linker Script Commands
3259There are a few other linker scripts commands.
3260
3261@table @code
3262@item ASSERT(@var{exp}, @var{message})
3263@kindex ASSERT
3264@cindex assertion in linker script
3265Ensure that @var{exp} is non-zero.  If it is zero, then exit the linker
3266with an error code, and print @var{message}.
3267
3268@item EXTERN(@var{symbol} @var{symbol} @dots{})
3269@kindex EXTERN
3270@cindex undefined symbol in linker script
3271Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
3272symbol.  Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
3273modules from standard libraries.  You may list several @var{symbol}s for
3274each @code{EXTERN}, and you may use @code{EXTERN} multiple times.  This
3275command has the same effect as the @samp{-u} command-line option.
3276
3277@item FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3278@kindex FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3279@cindex common allocation in linker script
3280This command has the same effect as the @samp{-d} command-line option:
3281to make @command{ld} assign space to common symbols even if a relocatable
3282output file is specified (@samp{-r}).
3283
3284@item INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3285@kindex INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3286@cindex common allocation in linker script
3287This command has the same effect as the @samp{--no-define-common}
3288command-line option: to make @code{ld} omit the assignment of addresses
3289to common symbols even for a non-relocatable output file.
3290
3291@item INSERT [ AFTER | BEFORE ] @var{output_section}
3292@kindex INSERT
3293@cindex insert user script into default script
3294This command is typically used in a script specified by @samp{-T} to
3295augment the default @code{SECTIONS} with, for example, overlays.  It
3296inserts all prior linker script statements after (or before)
3297@var{output_section}, and also causes @samp{-T} to not override the
3298default linker script.  The exact insertion point is as for orphan
3299sections.  @xref{Location Counter}.  The insertion happens after the
3300linker has mapped input sections to output sections.  Prior to the
3301insertion, since @samp{-T} scripts are parsed before the default
3302linker script, statements in the @samp{-T} script occur before the
3303default linker script statements in the internal linker representation
3304of the script.  In particular, input section assignments will be made
3305to @samp{-T} output sections before those in the default script.  Here
3306is an example of how a @samp{-T} script using @code{INSERT} might look:
3307
3308@smallexample
3309SECTIONS
3310@{
3311  OVERLAY :
3312  @{
3313    .ov1 @{ ov1*(.text) @}
3314    .ov2 @{ ov2*(.text) @}
3315  @}
3316@}
3317INSERT AFTER .text;
3318@end smallexample
3319
3320@item NOCROSSREFS(@var{section} @var{section} @dots{})
3321@kindex NOCROSSREFS(@var{sections})
3322@cindex cross references
3323This command may be used to tell @command{ld} to issue an error about any
3324references among certain output sections.
3325
3326In certain types of programs, particularly on embedded systems when
3327using overlays, when one section is loaded into memory, another section
3328will not be.  Any direct references between the two sections would be
3329errors.  For example, it would be an error if code in one section called
3330a function defined in the other section.
3331
3332The @code{NOCROSSREFS} command takes a list of output section names.  If
3333@command{ld} detects any cross references between the sections, it reports
3334an error and returns a non-zero exit status.  Note that the
3335@code{NOCROSSREFS} command uses output section names, not input section
3336names.
3337
3338@ifclear SingleFormat
3339@item OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3340@kindex OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3341@cindex machine architecture
3342@cindex architecture
3343Specify a particular output machine architecture.  The argument is one
3344of the names used by the BFD library (@pxref{BFD}).  You can see the
3345architecture of an object file by using the @code{objdump} program with
3346the @samp{-f} option.
3347@end ifclear
3348
3349@item LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
3350@kindex LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
3351This command may be used to modify @command{ld} behavior.  If
3352@var{string} is @code{"SANE_EXPR"} then absolute symbols and numbers
3353in a script are simply treated as numbers everywhere.
3354@xref{Expression Section}.
3355@end table
3356
3357@node Assignments
3358@section Assigning Values to Symbols
3359@cindex assignment in scripts
3360@cindex symbol definition, scripts
3361@cindex variables, defining
3362You may assign a value to a symbol in a linker script.  This will define
3363the symbol and place it into the symbol table with a global scope.
3364
3365@menu
3366* Simple Assignments::		Simple Assignments
3367* PROVIDE::			PROVIDE
3368* PROVIDE_HIDDEN::		PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3369* Source Code Reference::	How to use a linker script defined symbol in source code
3370@end menu
3371
3372@node Simple Assignments
3373@subsection Simple Assignments
3374
3375You may assign to a symbol using any of the C assignment operators:
3376
3377@table @code
3378@item @var{symbol} = @var{expression} ;
3379@itemx @var{symbol} += @var{expression} ;
3380@itemx @var{symbol} -= @var{expression} ;
3381@itemx @var{symbol} *= @var{expression} ;
3382@itemx @var{symbol} /= @var{expression} ;
3383@itemx @var{symbol} <<= @var{expression} ;
3384@itemx @var{symbol} >>= @var{expression} ;
3385@itemx @var{symbol} &= @var{expression} ;
3386@itemx @var{symbol} |= @var{expression} ;
3387@end table
3388
3389The first case will define @var{symbol} to the value of
3390@var{expression}.  In the other cases, @var{symbol} must already be
3391defined, and the value will be adjusted accordingly.
3392
3393The special symbol name @samp{.} indicates the location counter.  You
3394may only use this within a @code{SECTIONS} command.  @xref{Location Counter}.
3395
3396The semicolon after @var{expression} is required.
3397
3398Expressions are defined below; see @ref{Expressions}.
3399
3400You may write symbol assignments as commands in their own right, or as
3401statements within a @code{SECTIONS} command, or as part of an output
3402section description in a @code{SECTIONS} command.
3403
3404The section of the symbol will be set from the section of the
3405expression; for more information, see @ref{Expression Section}.
3406
3407Here is an example showing the three different places that symbol
3408assignments may be used:
3409
3410@smallexample
3411floating_point = 0;
3412SECTIONS
3413@{
3414  .text :
3415    @{
3416      *(.text)
3417      _etext = .;
3418    @}
3419  _bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3;
3420  .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3421@}
3422@end smallexample
3423@noindent
3424In this example, the symbol @samp{floating_point} will be defined as
3425zero.  The symbol @samp{_etext} will be defined as the address following
3426the last @samp{.text} input section.  The symbol @samp{_bdata} will be
3427defined as the address following the @samp{.text} output section aligned
3428upward to a 4 byte boundary.
3429
3430@node PROVIDE
3431@subsection PROVIDE
3432@cindex PROVIDE
3433In some cases, it is desirable for a linker script to define a symbol
3434only if it is referenced and is not defined by any object included in
3435the link.  For example, traditional linkers defined the symbol
3436@samp{etext}.  However, ANSI C requires that the user be able to use
3437@samp{etext} as a function name without encountering an error.  The
3438@code{PROVIDE} keyword may be used to define a symbol, such as
3439@samp{etext}, only if it is referenced but not defined.  The syntax is
3440@code{PROVIDE(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
3441
3442Here is an example of using @code{PROVIDE} to define @samp{etext}:
3443@smallexample
3444SECTIONS
3445@{
3446  .text :
3447    @{
3448      *(.text)
3449      _etext = .;
3450      PROVIDE(etext = .);
3451    @}
3452@}
3453@end smallexample
3454
3455In this example, if the program defines @samp{_etext} (with a leading
3456underscore), the linker will give a multiple definition error.  If, on
3457the other hand, the program defines @samp{etext} (with no leading
3458underscore), the linker will silently use the definition in the program.
3459If the program references @samp{etext} but does not define it, the
3460linker will use the definition in the linker script.
3461
3462@node PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3463@subsection PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3464@cindex PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3465Similar to @code{PROVIDE}.  For ELF targeted ports, the symbol will be
3466hidden and won't be exported.
3467
3468@node Source Code Reference
3469@subsection Source Code Reference
3470
3471Accessing a linker script defined variable from source code is not
3472intuitive.  In particular a linker script symbol is not equivalent to
3473a variable declaration in a high level language, it is instead a
3474symbol that does not have a value.
3475
3476Before going further, it is important to note that compilers often
3477transform names in the source code into different names when they are
3478stored in the symbol table.  For example, Fortran compilers commonly
3479prepend or append an underscore, and C++ performs extensive @samp{name
3480mangling}.  Therefore there might be a discrepancy between the name
3481of a variable as it is used in source code and the name of the same
3482variable as it is defined in a linker script.  For example in C a
3483linker script variable might be referred to as:
3484
3485@smallexample
3486  extern int foo;
3487@end smallexample
3488
3489But in the linker script it might be defined as:
3490
3491@smallexample
3492  _foo = 1000;
3493@end smallexample
3494
3495In the remaining examples however it is assumed that no name
3496transformation has taken place.
3497
3498When a symbol is declared in a high level language such as C, two
3499things happen.  The first is that the compiler reserves enough space
3500in the program's memory to hold the @emph{value} of the symbol.  The
3501second is that the compiler creates an entry in the program's symbol
3502table which holds the symbol's @emph{address}.  ie the symbol table
3503contains the address of the block of memory holding the symbol's
3504value.  So for example the following C declaration, at file scope:
3505
3506@smallexample
3507  int foo = 1000;
3508@end smallexample
3509
3510creates a entry called @samp{foo} in the symbol table.  This entry
3511holds the address of an @samp{int} sized block of memory where the
3512number 1000 is initially stored.
3513
3514When a program references a symbol the compiler generates code that
3515first accesses the symbol table to find the address of the symbol's
3516memory block and then code to read the value from that memory block.
3517So:
3518
3519@smallexample
3520  foo = 1;
3521@end smallexample
3522
3523looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets the address
3524associated with this symbol and then writes the value 1 into that
3525address.  Whereas:
3526
3527@smallexample
3528  int * a = & foo;
3529@end smallexample
3530
3531looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets it address
3532and then copies this address into the block of memory associated with
3533the variable @samp{a}.
3534
3535Linker scripts symbol declarations, by contrast, create an entry in
3536the symbol table but do not assign any memory to them.  Thus they are
3537an address without a value.  So for example the linker script definition:
3538
3539@smallexample
3540  foo = 1000;
3541@end smallexample
3542
3543creates an entry in the symbol table called @samp{foo} which holds
3544the address of memory location 1000, but nothing special is stored at
3545address 1000.  This means that you cannot access the @emph{value} of a
3546linker script defined symbol - it has no value - all you can do is
3547access the @emph{address} of a linker script defined symbol.
3548
3549Hence when you are using a linker script defined symbol in source code
3550you should always take the address of the symbol, and never attempt to
3551use its value.  For example suppose you want to copy the contents of a
3552section of memory called .ROM into a section called .FLASH and the
3553linker script contains these declarations:
3554
3555@smallexample
3556@group
3557  start_of_ROM   = .ROM;
3558  end_of_ROM     = .ROM + sizeof (.ROM) - 1;
3559  start_of_FLASH = .FLASH;
3560@end group
3561@end smallexample
3562
3563Then the C source code to perform the copy would be:
3564
3565@smallexample
3566@group
3567  extern char start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM, start_of_FLASH;
3568
3569  memcpy (& start_of_FLASH, & start_of_ROM, & end_of_ROM - & start_of_ROM);
3570@end group
3571@end smallexample
3572
3573Note the use of the @samp{&} operators.  These are correct.
3574
3575@node SECTIONS
3576@section SECTIONS Command
3577@kindex SECTIONS
3578The @code{SECTIONS} command tells the linker how to map input sections
3579into output sections, and how to place the output sections in memory.
3580
3581The format of the @code{SECTIONS} command is:
3582@smallexample
3583SECTIONS
3584@{
3585  @var{sections-command}
3586  @var{sections-command}
3587  @dots{}
3588@}
3589@end smallexample
3590
3591Each @var{sections-command} may of be one of the following:
3592
3593@itemize @bullet
3594@item
3595an @code{ENTRY} command (@pxref{Entry Point,,Entry command})
3596@item
3597a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
3598@item
3599an output section description
3600@item
3601an overlay description
3602@end itemize
3603
3604The @code{ENTRY} command and symbol assignments are permitted inside the
3605@code{SECTIONS} command for convenience in using the location counter in
3606those commands.  This can also make the linker script easier to
3607understand because you can use those commands at meaningful points in
3608the layout of the output file.
3609
3610Output section descriptions and overlay descriptions are described
3611below.
3612
3613If you do not use a @code{SECTIONS} command in your linker script, the
3614linker will place each input section into an identically named output
3615section in the order that the sections are first encountered in the
3616input files.  If all input sections are present in the first file, for
3617example, the order of sections in the output file will match the order
3618in the first input file.  The first section will be at address zero.
3619
3620@menu
3621* Output Section Description::	Output section description
3622* Output Section Name::		Output section name
3623* Output Section Address::	Output section address
3624* Input Section::		Input section description
3625* Output Section Data::		Output section data
3626* Output Section Keywords::	Output section keywords
3627* Output Section Discarding::	Output section discarding
3628* Output Section Attributes::	Output section attributes
3629* Overlay Description::		Overlay description
3630@end menu
3631
3632@node Output Section Description
3633@subsection Output Section Description
3634The full description of an output section looks like this:
3635@smallexample
3636@group
3637@var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
3638  [AT(@var{lma})]
3639  [ALIGN(@var{section_align})]
3640  [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
3641  [@var{constraint}]
3642  @{
3643    @var{output-section-command}
3644    @var{output-section-command}
3645    @dots{}
3646  @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}]
3647@end group
3648@end smallexample
3649
3650Most output sections do not use most of the optional section attributes.
3651
3652The whitespace around @var{section} is required, so that the section
3653name is unambiguous.  The colon and the curly braces are also required.
3654The line breaks and other white space are optional.
3655
3656Each @var{output-section-command} may be one of the following:
3657
3658@itemize @bullet
3659@item
3660a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
3661@item
3662an input section description (@pxref{Input Section})
3663@item
3664data values to include directly (@pxref{Output Section Data})
3665@item
3666a special output section keyword (@pxref{Output Section Keywords})
3667@end itemize
3668
3669@node Output Section Name
3670@subsection Output Section Name
3671@cindex name, section
3672@cindex section name
3673The name of the output section is @var{section}.  @var{section} must
3674meet the constraints of your output format.  In formats which only
3675support a limited number of sections, such as @code{a.out}, the name
3676must be one of the names supported by the format (@code{a.out}, for
3677example, allows only @samp{.text}, @samp{.data} or @samp{.bss}). If the
3678output format supports any number of sections, but with numbers and not
3679names (as is the case for Oasys), the name should be supplied as a
3680quoted numeric string.  A section name may consist of any sequence of
3681characters, but a name which contains any unusual characters such as
3682commas must be quoted.
3683
3684The output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} is special; @ref{Output Section
3685Discarding}.
3686
3687@node Output Section Address
3688@subsection Output Section Address
3689@cindex address, section
3690@cindex section address
3691The @var{address} is an expression for the VMA (the virtual memory
3692address) of the output section.  This address is optional, but if it
3693is provided then the output address will be set exactly as specified.
3694
3695If the output address is not specified then one will be chosen for the
3696section, based on the heuristic below.  This address will be adjusted
3697to fit the alignment requirement of the output section.  The
3698alignment requirement is the strictest alignment of any input section
3699contained within the output section.
3700
3701The output section address heuristic is as follows:
3702
3703@itemize @bullet
3704@item
3705If an output memory @var{region} is set for the section then it
3706is added to this region and its address will be the next free address
3707in that region.
3708
3709@item
3710If the MEMORY command has been used to create a list of memory
3711regions then the first region which has attributes compatible with the
3712section is selected to contain it.  The section's output address will
3713be the next free address in that region; @ref{MEMORY}.
3714
3715@item
3716If no memory regions were specified, or none match the section then
3717the output address will be based on the current value of the location
3718counter.
3719@end itemize
3720
3721@noindent
3722For example:
3723
3724@smallexample
3725.text . : @{ *(.text) @}
3726@end smallexample
3727
3728@noindent
3729and
3730
3731@smallexample
3732.text : @{ *(.text) @}
3733@end smallexample
3734
3735@noindent
3736are subtly different.  The first will set the address of the
3737@samp{.text} output section to the current value of the location
3738counter.  The second will set it to the current value of the location
3739counter aligned to the strictest alignment of any of the @samp{.text}
3740input sections.
3741
3742The @var{address} may be an arbitrary expression; @ref{Expressions}.
3743For example, if you want to align the section on a 0x10 byte boundary,
3744so that the lowest four bits of the section address are zero, you could
3745do something like this:
3746@smallexample
3747.text ALIGN(0x10) : @{ *(.text) @}
3748@end smallexample
3749@noindent
3750This works because @code{ALIGN} returns the current location counter
3751aligned upward to the specified value.
3752
3753Specifying @var{address} for a section will change the value of the
3754location counter, provided that the section is non-empty.  (Empty
3755sections are ignored).
3756
3757@node Input Section
3758@subsection Input Section Description
3759@cindex input sections
3760@cindex mapping input sections to output sections
3761The most common output section command is an input section description.
3762
3763The input section description is the most basic linker script operation.
3764You use output sections to tell the linker how to lay out your program
3765in memory.  You use input section descriptions to tell the linker how to
3766map the input files into your memory layout.
3767
3768@menu
3769* Input Section Basics::	Input section basics
3770* Input Section Wildcards::	Input section wildcard patterns
3771* Input Section Common::	Input section for common symbols
3772* Input Section Keep::		Input section and garbage collection
3773* Input Section Example::	Input section example
3774@end menu
3775
3776@node Input Section Basics
3777@subsubsection Input Section Basics
3778@cindex input section basics
3779An input section description consists of a file name optionally followed
3780by a list of section names in parentheses.
3781
3782The file name and the section name may be wildcard patterns, which we
3783describe further below (@pxref{Input Section Wildcards}).
3784
3785The most common input section description is to include all input
3786sections with a particular name in the output section.  For example, to
3787include all input @samp{.text} sections, you would write:
3788@smallexample
3789*(.text)
3790@end smallexample
3791@noindent
3792Here the @samp{*} is a wildcard which matches any file name.  To exclude a list
3793of files from matching the file name wildcard, EXCLUDE_FILE may be used to
3794match all files except the ones specified in the EXCLUDE_FILE list.  For
3795example:
3796@smallexample
3797*(EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) .ctors)
3798@end smallexample
3799will cause all .ctors sections from all files except @file{crtend.o} and
3800@file{otherfile.o} to be included.
3801
3802There are two ways to include more than one section:
3803@smallexample
3804*(.text .rdata)
3805*(.text) *(.rdata)
3806@end smallexample
3807@noindent
3808The difference between these is the order in which the @samp{.text} and
3809@samp{.rdata} input sections will appear in the output section.  In the
3810first example, they will be intermingled, appearing in the same order as
3811they are found in the linker input.  In the second example, all
3812@samp{.text} input sections will appear first, followed by all
3813@samp{.rdata} input sections.
3814
3815You can specify a file name to include sections from a particular file.
3816You would do this if one or more of your files contain special data that
3817needs to be at a particular location in memory.  For example:
3818@smallexample
3819data.o(.data)
3820@end smallexample
3821
3822You can also specify files within archives by writing a pattern
3823matching the archive, a colon, then the pattern matching the file,
3824with no whitespace around the colon.
3825
3826@table @samp
3827@item archive:file
3828matches file within archive
3829@item archive:
3830matches the whole archive
3831@item :file
3832matches file but not one in an archive
3833@end table
3834
3835Either one or both of @samp{archive} and @samp{file} can contain shell
3836wildcards.  On DOS based file systems, the linker will assume that a
3837single letter followed by a colon is a drive specifier, so
3838@samp{c:myfile.o} is a simple file specification, not @samp{myfile.o}
3839within an archive called @samp{c}.  @samp{archive:file} filespecs may
3840also be used within an @code{EXCLUDE_FILE} list, but may not appear in
3841other linker script contexts.  For instance, you cannot extract a file
3842from an archive by using @samp{archive:file} in an @code{INPUT}
3843command.
3844
3845If you use a file name without a list of sections, then all sections in
3846the input file will be included in the output section.  This is not
3847commonly done, but it may by useful on occasion.  For example:
3848@smallexample
3849data.o
3850@end smallexample
3851
3852When you use a file name which is not an @samp{archive:file} specifier
3853and does not contain any wild card
3854characters, the linker will first see if you also specified the file
3855name on the linker command line or in an @code{INPUT} command.  If you
3856did not, the linker will attempt to open the file as an input file, as
3857though it appeared on the command line.  Note that this differs from an
3858@code{INPUT} command, because the linker will not search for the file in
3859the archive search path.
3860
3861@node Input Section Wildcards
3862@subsubsection Input Section Wildcard Patterns
3863@cindex input section wildcards
3864@cindex wildcard file name patterns
3865@cindex file name wildcard patterns
3866@cindex section name wildcard patterns
3867In an input section description, either the file name or the section
3868name or both may be wildcard patterns.
3869
3870The file name of @samp{*} seen in many examples is a simple wildcard
3871pattern for the file name.
3872
3873The wildcard patterns are like those used by the Unix shell.
3874
3875@table @samp
3876@item *
3877matches any number of characters
3878@item ?
3879matches any single character
3880@item [@var{chars}]
3881matches a single instance of any of the @var{chars}; the @samp{-}
3882character may be used to specify a range of characters, as in
3883@samp{[a-z]} to match any lower case letter
3884@item \
3885quotes the following character
3886@end table
3887
3888When a file name is matched with a wildcard, the wildcard characters
3889will not match a @samp{/} character (used to separate directory names on
3890Unix).  A pattern consisting of a single @samp{*} character is an
3891exception; it will always match any file name, whether it contains a
3892@samp{/} or not.  In a section name, the wildcard characters will match
3893a @samp{/} character.
3894
3895File name wildcard patterns only match files which are explicitly
3896specified on the command line or in an @code{INPUT} command.  The linker
3897does not search directories to expand wildcards.
3898
3899If a file name matches more than one wildcard pattern, or if a file name
3900appears explicitly and is also matched by a wildcard pattern, the linker
3901will use the first match in the linker script.  For example, this
3902sequence of input section descriptions is probably in error, because the
3903@file{data.o} rule will not be used:
3904@smallexample
3905.data : @{ *(.data) @}
3906.data1 : @{ data.o(.data) @}
3907@end smallexample
3908
3909@cindex SORT_BY_NAME
3910Normally, the linker will place files and sections matched by wildcards
3911in the order in which they are seen during the link.  You can change
3912this by using the @code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword, which appears before a wildcard
3913pattern in parentheses (e.g., @code{SORT_BY_NAME(.text*)}).  When the
3914@code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword is used, the linker will sort the files or sections
3915into ascending order by name before placing them in the output file.
3916
3917@cindex SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT
3918@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
3919difference is @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} will sort sections into
3920ascending order by alignment before placing them in the output file.
3921
3922@cindex SORT
3923@code{SORT} is an alias for @code{SORT_BY_NAME}.
3924
3925When there are nested section sorting commands in linker script, there
3926can be at most 1 level of nesting for section sorting commands.
3927
3928@enumerate
3929@item
3930@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
3931It will sort the input sections by name first, then by alignment if 2
3932sections have the same name.
3933@item
3934@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
3935It will sort the input sections by alignment first, then by name if 2
3936sections have the same alignment.
3937@item
3938@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)) is
3939treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern).
3940@item
3941@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern))
3942is treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern).
3943@item
3944All other nested section sorting commands are invalid.
3945@end enumerate
3946
3947When both command line section sorting option and linker script
3948section sorting command are used, section sorting command always
3949takes precedence over the command line option.
3950
3951If the section sorting command in linker script isn't nested, the
3952command line option will make the section sorting command to be
3953treated as nested sorting command.
3954
3955@enumerate
3956@item
3957@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern ) with
3958@option{--sort-sections alignment} is equivalent to
3959@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
3960@item
3961@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern) with
3962@option{--sort-section name} is equivalent to
3963@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
3964@end enumerate
3965
3966If the section sorting command in linker script is nested, the
3967command line option will be ignored.
3968
3969If you ever get confused about where input sections are going, use the
3970@samp{-M} linker option to generate a map file.  The map file shows
3971precisely how input sections are mapped to output sections.
3972
3973This example shows how wildcard patterns might be used to partition
3974files.  This linker script directs the linker to place all @samp{.text}
3975sections in @samp{.text} and all @samp{.bss} sections in @samp{.bss}.
3976The linker will place the @samp{.data} section from all files beginning
3977with an upper case character in @samp{.DATA}; for all other files, the
3978linker will place the @samp{.data} section in @samp{.data}.
3979@smallexample
3980@group
3981SECTIONS @{
3982  .text : @{ *(.text) @}
3983  .DATA : @{ [A-Z]*(.data) @}
3984  .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3985  .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
3986@}
3987@end group
3988@end smallexample
3989
3990@node Input Section Common
3991@subsubsection Input Section for Common Symbols
3992@cindex common symbol placement
3993@cindex uninitialized data placement
3994A special notation is needed for common symbols, because in many object
3995file formats common symbols do not have a particular input section.  The
3996linker treats common symbols as though they are in an input section
3997named @samp{COMMON}.
3998
3999You may use file names with the @samp{COMMON} section just as with any
4000other input sections.  You can use this to place common symbols from a
4001particular input file in one section while common symbols from other
4002input files are placed in another section.
4003
4004In most cases, common symbols in input files will be placed in the
4005@samp{.bss} section in the output file.  For example:
4006@smallexample
4007.bss @{ *(.bss) *(COMMON) @}
4008@end smallexample
4009
4010@cindex scommon section
4011@cindex small common symbols
4012Some object file formats have more than one type of common symbol.  For
4013example, the MIPS ELF object file format distinguishes standard common
4014symbols and small common symbols.  In this case, the linker will use a
4015different special section name for other types of common symbols.  In
4016the case of MIPS ELF, the linker uses @samp{COMMON} for standard common
4017symbols and @samp{.scommon} for small common symbols.  This permits you
4018to map the different types of common symbols into memory at different
4019locations.
4020
4021@cindex [COMMON]
4022You will sometimes see @samp{[COMMON]} in old linker scripts.  This
4023notation is now considered obsolete.  It is equivalent to
4024@samp{*(COMMON)}.
4025
4026@node Input Section Keep
4027@subsubsection Input Section and Garbage Collection
4028@cindex KEEP
4029@cindex garbage collection
4030When link-time garbage collection is in use (@samp{--gc-sections}),
4031it is often useful to mark sections that should not be eliminated.
4032This is accomplished by surrounding an input section's wildcard entry
4033with @code{KEEP()}, as in @code{KEEP(*(.init))} or
4034@code{KEEP(SORT_BY_NAME(*)(.ctors))}.
4035
4036@node Input Section Example
4037@subsubsection Input Section Example
4038The following example is a complete linker script.  It tells the linker
4039to read all of the sections from file @file{all.o} and place them at the
4040start of output section @samp{outputa} which starts at location
4041@samp{0x10000}.  All of section @samp{.input1} from file @file{foo.o}
4042follows immediately, in the same output section.  All of section
4043@samp{.input2} from @file{foo.o} goes into output section
4044@samp{outputb}, followed by section @samp{.input1} from @file{foo1.o}.
4045All of the remaining @samp{.input1} and @samp{.input2} sections from any
4046files are written to output section @samp{outputc}.
4047
4048@smallexample
4049@group
4050SECTIONS @{
4051  outputa 0x10000 :
4052    @{
4053    all.o
4054    foo.o (.input1)
4055    @}
4056@end group
4057@group
4058  outputb :
4059    @{
4060    foo.o (.input2)
4061    foo1.o (.input1)
4062    @}
4063@end group
4064@group
4065  outputc :
4066    @{
4067    *(.input1)
4068    *(.input2)
4069    @}
4070@}
4071@end group
4072@end smallexample
4073
4074@node Output Section Data
4075@subsection Output Section Data
4076@cindex data
4077@cindex section data
4078@cindex output section data
4079@kindex BYTE(@var{expression})
4080@kindex SHORT(@var{expression})
4081@kindex LONG(@var{expression})
4082@kindex QUAD(@var{expression})
4083@kindex SQUAD(@var{expression})
4084You can include explicit bytes of data in an output section by using
4085@code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, @code{QUAD}, or @code{SQUAD} as
4086an output section command.  Each keyword is followed by an expression in
4087parentheses providing the value to store (@pxref{Expressions}).  The
4088value of the expression is stored at the current value of the location
4089counter.
4090
4091The @code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, and @code{QUAD} commands
4092store one, two, four, and eight bytes (respectively).  After storing the
4093bytes, the location counter is incremented by the number of bytes
4094stored.
4095
4096For example, this will store the byte 1 followed by the four byte value
4097of the symbol @samp{addr}:
4098@smallexample
4099BYTE(1)
4100LONG(addr)
4101@end smallexample
4102
4103When using a 64 bit host or target, @code{QUAD} and @code{SQUAD} are the
4104same; they both store an 8 byte, or 64 bit, value.  When both host and
4105target are 32 bits, an expression is computed as 32 bits.  In this case
4106@code{QUAD} stores a 32 bit value zero extended to 64 bits, and
4107@code{SQUAD} stores a 32 bit value sign extended to 64 bits.
4108
4109If the object file format of the output file has an explicit endianness,
4110which is the normal case, the value will be stored in that endianness.
4111When the object file format does not have an explicit endianness, as is
4112true of, for example, S-records, the value will be stored in the
4113endianness of the first input object file.
4114
4115Note---these commands only work inside a section description and not
4116between them, so the following will produce an error from the linker:
4117@smallexample
4118SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) @}@ LONG(1) .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4119@end smallexample
4120whereas this will work:
4121@smallexample
4122SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) ; LONG(1) @}@ .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4123@end smallexample
4124
4125@kindex FILL(@var{expression})
4126@cindex holes, filling
4127@cindex unspecified memory
4128You may use the @code{FILL} command to set the fill pattern for the
4129current section.  It is followed by an expression in parentheses.  Any
4130otherwise unspecified regions of memory within the section (for example,
4131gaps left due to the required alignment of input sections) are filled
4132with the value of the expression, repeated as
4133necessary.  A @code{FILL} statement covers memory locations after the
4134point at which it occurs in the section definition; by including more
4135than one @code{FILL} statement, you can have different fill patterns in
4136different parts of an output section.
4137
4138This example shows how to fill unspecified regions of memory with the
4139value @samp{0x90}:
4140@smallexample
4141FILL(0x90909090)
4142@end smallexample
4143
4144The @code{FILL} command is similar to the @samp{=@var{fillexp}} output
4145section attribute, but it only affects the
4146part of the section following the @code{FILL} command, rather than the
4147entire section.  If both are used, the @code{FILL} command takes
4148precedence.  @xref{Output Section Fill}, for details on the fill
4149expression.
4150
4151@node Output Section Keywords
4152@subsection Output Section Keywords
4153There are a couple of keywords which can appear as output section
4154commands.
4155
4156@table @code
4157@kindex CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4158@cindex input filename symbols
4159@cindex filename symbols
4160@item CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4161The command tells the linker to create a symbol for each input file.
4162The name of each symbol will be the name of the corresponding input
4163file.  The section of each symbol will be the output section in which
4164the @code{CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS} command appears.
4165
4166This is conventional for the a.out object file format.  It is not
4167normally used for any other object file format.
4168
4169@kindex CONSTRUCTORS
4170@cindex C++ constructors, arranging in link
4171@cindex constructors, arranging in link
4172@item CONSTRUCTORS
4173When linking using the a.out object file format, the linker uses an
4174unusual set construct to support C++ global constructors and
4175destructors.  When linking object file formats which do not support
4176arbitrary sections, such as ECOFF and XCOFF, the linker will
4177automatically recognize C++ global constructors and destructors by name.
4178For these object file formats, the @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command tells the
4179linker to place constructor information in the output section where the
4180@code{CONSTRUCTORS} command appears.  The @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command is
4181ignored for other object file formats.
4182
4183The symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_LIST__}} marks the start of the global
4184constructors, and the symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_END__}} marks the end.
4185Similarly, @w{@code{__DTOR_LIST__}} and @w{@code{__DTOR_END__}} mark
4186the start and end of the global destructors.  The
4187first word in the list is the number of entries, followed by the address
4188of each constructor or destructor, followed by a zero word.  The
4189compiler must arrange to actually run the code.  For these object file
4190formats @sc{gnu} C++ normally calls constructors from a subroutine
4191@code{__main}; a call to @code{__main} is automatically inserted into
4192the startup code for @code{main}.  @sc{gnu} C++ normally runs
4193destructors either by using @code{atexit}, or directly from the function
4194@code{exit}.
4195
4196For object file formats such as @code{COFF} or @code{ELF} which support
4197arbitrary section names, @sc{gnu} C++ will normally arrange to put the
4198addresses of global constructors and destructors into the @code{.ctors}
4199and @code{.dtors} sections.  Placing the following sequence into your
4200linker script will build the sort of table which the @sc{gnu} C++
4201runtime code expects to see.
4202
4203@smallexample
4204      __CTOR_LIST__ = .;
4205      LONG((__CTOR_END__ - __CTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4206      *(.ctors)
4207      LONG(0)
4208      __CTOR_END__ = .;
4209      __DTOR_LIST__ = .;
4210      LONG((__DTOR_END__ - __DTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4211      *(.dtors)
4212      LONG(0)
4213      __DTOR_END__ = .;
4214@end smallexample
4215
4216If you are using the @sc{gnu} C++ support for initialization priority,
4217which provides some control over the order in which global constructors
4218are run, you must sort the constructors at link time to ensure that they
4219are executed in the correct order.  When using the @code{CONSTRUCTORS}
4220command, use @samp{SORT_BY_NAME(CONSTRUCTORS)} instead.  When using the
4221@code{.ctors} and @code{.dtors} sections, use @samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.ctors))} and
4222@samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.dtors))} instead of just @samp{*(.ctors)} and
4223@samp{*(.dtors)}.
4224
4225Normally the compiler and linker will handle these issues automatically,
4226and you will not need to concern yourself with them.  However, you may
4227need to consider this if you are using C++ and writing your own linker
4228scripts.
4229
4230@end table
4231
4232@node Output Section Discarding
4233@subsection Output Section Discarding
4234@cindex discarding sections
4235@cindex sections, discarding
4236@cindex removing sections
4237The linker will not create output sections with no contents.  This is
4238for convenience when referring to input sections that may or may not
4239be present in any of the input files.  For example:
4240@smallexample
4241.foo : @{ *(.foo) @}
4242@end smallexample
4243@noindent
4244will only create a @samp{.foo} section in the output file if there is a
4245@samp{.foo} section in at least one input file, and if the input
4246sections are not all empty.  Other link script directives that allocate
4247space in an output section will also create the output section.
4248
4249The linker will ignore address assignments (@pxref{Output Section Address})
4250on discarded output sections, except when the linker script defines
4251symbols in the output section.  In that case the linker will obey
4252the address assignments, possibly advancing dot even though the
4253section is discarded.
4254
4255@cindex /DISCARD/
4256The special output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} may be used to discard
4257input sections.  Any input sections which are assigned to an output
4258section named @samp{/DISCARD/} are not included in the output file.
4259
4260@node Output Section Attributes
4261@subsection Output Section Attributes
4262@cindex output section attributes
4263We showed above that the full description of an output section looked
4264like this:
4265
4266@smallexample
4267@group
4268@var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
4269  [AT(@var{lma})]
4270  [ALIGN(@var{section_align})]
4271  [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
4272  [@var{constraint}]
4273  @{
4274    @var{output-section-command}
4275    @var{output-section-command}
4276    @dots{}
4277  @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}]
4278@end group
4279@end smallexample
4280
4281We've already described @var{section}, @var{address}, and
4282@var{output-section-command}.  In this section we will describe the
4283remaining section attributes.
4284
4285@menu
4286* Output Section Type::		Output section type
4287* Output Section LMA::		Output section LMA
4288* Forced Output Alignment::	Forced Output Alignment
4289* Forced Input Alignment::	Forced Input Alignment
4290* Output Section Constraint::   Output section constraint
4291* Output Section Region::	Output section region
4292* Output Section Phdr::		Output section phdr
4293* Output Section Fill::		Output section fill
4294@end menu
4295
4296@node Output Section Type
4297@subsubsection Output Section Type
4298Each output section may have a type.  The type is a keyword in
4299parentheses.  The following types are defined:
4300
4301@table @code
4302@item NOLOAD
4303The section should be marked as not loadable, so that it will not be
4304loaded into memory when the program is run.
4305@item DSECT
4306@itemx COPY
4307@itemx INFO
4308@itemx OVERLAY
4309These type names are supported for backward compatibility, and are
4310rarely used.  They all have the same effect: the section should be
4311marked as not allocatable, so that no memory is allocated for the
4312section when the program is run.
4313@end table
4314
4315@kindex NOLOAD
4316@cindex prevent unnecessary loading
4317@cindex loading, preventing
4318The linker normally sets the attributes of an output section based on
4319the input sections which map into it.  You can override this by using
4320the section type.  For example, in the script sample below, the
4321@samp{ROM} section is addressed at memory location @samp{0} and does not
4322need to be loaded when the program is run.
4323@smallexample
4324@group
4325SECTIONS @{
4326  ROM 0 (NOLOAD) : @{ @dots{} @}
4327  @dots{}
4328@}
4329@end group
4330@end smallexample
4331
4332@node Output Section LMA
4333@subsubsection Output Section LMA
4334@kindex AT>@var{lma_region}
4335@kindex AT(@var{lma})
4336@cindex load address
4337@cindex section load address
4338Every section has a virtual address (VMA) and a load address (LMA); see
4339@ref{Basic Script Concepts}.  The virtual address is specified by the
4340@pxref{Output Section Address} described earlier.  The load address is
4341specified by the @code{AT} or @code{AT>} keywords.  Specifying a load
4342address is optional.
4343
4344The @code{AT} keyword takes an expression as an argument.  This
4345specifies the exact load address of the section.  The @code{AT>} keyword
4346takes the name of a memory region as an argument.  @xref{MEMORY}.  The
4347load address of the section is set to the next free address in the
4348region, aligned to the section's alignment requirements.
4349
4350If neither @code{AT} nor @code{AT>} is specified for an allocatable
4351section, the linker will use the following heuristic to determine the
4352load address:
4353
4354@itemize @bullet
4355@item
4356If the section has a specific VMA address, then this is used as
4357the LMA address as well.
4358
4359@item
4360If the section is not allocatable then its LMA is set to its VMA.
4361
4362@item
4363Otherwise if a memory region can be found that is compatible
4364with the current section, and this region contains at least one
4365section, then the LMA is set so the difference between the
4366VMA and LMA is the same as the difference between the VMA and LMA of
4367the last section in the located region.
4368
4369@item
4370If no memory regions have been declared then a default region
4371that covers the entire address space is used in the previous step.
4372
4373@item
4374If no suitable region could be found, or there was no previous
4375section then the LMA is set equal to the VMA.
4376@end itemize
4377
4378@cindex ROM initialized data
4379@cindex initialized data in ROM
4380This feature is designed to make it easy to build a ROM image.  For
4381example, the following linker script creates three output sections: one
4382called @samp{.text}, which starts at @code{0x1000}, one called
4383@samp{.mdata}, which is loaded at the end of the @samp{.text} section
4384even though its VMA is @code{0x2000}, and one called @samp{.bss} to hold
4385uninitialized data at address @code{0x3000}.  The symbol @code{_data} is
4386defined with the value @code{0x2000}, which shows that the location
4387counter holds the VMA value, not the LMA value.
4388
4389@smallexample
4390@group
4391SECTIONS
4392  @{
4393  .text 0x1000 : @{ *(.text) _etext = . ; @}
4394  .mdata 0x2000 :
4395    AT ( ADDR (.text) + SIZEOF (.text) )
4396    @{ _data = . ; *(.data); _edata = . ;  @}
4397  .bss 0x3000 :
4398    @{ _bstart = . ;  *(.bss) *(COMMON) ; _bend = . ;@}
4399@}
4400@end group
4401@end smallexample
4402
4403The run-time initialization code for use with a program generated with
4404this linker script would include something like the following, to copy
4405the initialized data from the ROM image to its runtime address.  Notice
4406how this code takes advantage of the symbols defined by the linker
4407script.
4408
4409@smallexample
4410@group
4411extern char _etext, _data, _edata, _bstart, _bend;
4412char *src = &_etext;
4413char *dst = &_data;
4414
4415/* ROM has data at end of text; copy it.  */
4416while (dst < &_edata)
4417  *dst++ = *src++;
4418
4419/* Zero bss.  */
4420for (dst = &_bstart; dst< &_bend; dst++)
4421  *dst = 0;
4422@end group
4423@end smallexample
4424
4425@node Forced Output Alignment
4426@subsubsection Forced Output Alignment
4427@kindex ALIGN(@var{section_align})
4428@cindex forcing output section alignment
4429@cindex output section alignment
4430You can increase an output section's alignment by using ALIGN.
4431
4432@node Forced Input Alignment
4433@subsubsection Forced Input Alignment
4434@kindex SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})
4435@cindex forcing input section alignment
4436@cindex input section alignment
4437You can force input section alignment within an output section by using
4438SUBALIGN.  The value specified overrides any alignment given by input
4439sections, whether larger or smaller.
4440
4441@node Output Section Constraint
4442@subsubsection Output Section Constraint
4443@kindex ONLY_IF_RO
4444@kindex ONLY_IF_RW
4445@cindex constraints on output sections
4446You can specify that an output section should only be created if all
4447of its input sections are read-only or all of its input sections are
4448read-write by using the keyword @code{ONLY_IF_RO} and
4449@code{ONLY_IF_RW} respectively.
4450
4451@node Output Section Region
4452@subsubsection Output Section Region
4453@kindex >@var{region}
4454@cindex section, assigning to memory region
4455@cindex memory regions and sections
4456You can assign a section to a previously defined region of memory by
4457using @samp{>@var{region}}.  @xref{MEMORY}.
4458
4459Here is a simple example:
4460@smallexample
4461@group
4462MEMORY @{ rom : ORIGIN = 0x1000, LENGTH = 0x1000 @}
4463SECTIONS @{ ROM : @{ *(.text) @} >rom @}
4464@end group
4465@end smallexample
4466
4467@node Output Section Phdr
4468@subsubsection Output Section Phdr
4469@kindex :@var{phdr}
4470@cindex section, assigning to program header
4471@cindex program headers and sections
4472You can assign a section to a previously defined program segment by
4473using @samp{:@var{phdr}}.  @xref{PHDRS}.  If a section is assigned to
4474one or more segments, then all subsequent allocated sections will be
4475assigned to those segments as well, unless they use an explicitly
4476@code{:@var{phdr}} modifier.  You can use @code{:NONE} to tell the
4477linker to not put the section in any segment at all.
4478
4479Here is a simple example:
4480@smallexample
4481@group
4482PHDRS @{ text PT_LOAD ; @}
4483SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text @}
4484@end group
4485@end smallexample
4486
4487@node Output Section Fill
4488@subsubsection Output Section Fill
4489@kindex =@var{fillexp}
4490@cindex section fill pattern
4491@cindex fill pattern, entire section
4492You can set the fill pattern for an entire section by using
4493@samp{=@var{fillexp}}.  @var{fillexp} is an expression
4494(@pxref{Expressions}).  Any otherwise unspecified regions of memory
4495within the output section (for example, gaps left due to the required
4496alignment of input sections) will be filled with the value, repeated as
4497necessary.  If the fill expression is a simple hex number, ie. a string
4498of hex digit starting with @samp{0x} and without a trailing @samp{k} or @samp{M}, then
4499an arbitrarily long sequence of hex digits can be used to specify the
4500fill pattern;  Leading zeros become part of the pattern too.  For all
4501other cases, including extra parentheses or a unary @code{+}, the fill
4502pattern is the four least significant bytes of the value of the
4503expression.  In all cases, the number is big-endian.
4504
4505You can also change the fill value with a @code{FILL} command in the
4506output section commands; (@pxref{Output Section Data}).
4507
4508Here is a simple example:
4509@smallexample
4510@group
4511SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} =0x90909090 @}
4512@end group
4513@end smallexample
4514
4515@node Overlay Description
4516@subsection Overlay Description
4517@kindex OVERLAY
4518@cindex overlays
4519An overlay description provides an easy way to describe sections which
4520are to be loaded as part of a single memory image but are to be run at
4521the same memory address.  At run time, some sort of overlay manager will
4522copy the overlaid sections in and out of the runtime memory address as
4523required, perhaps by simply manipulating addressing bits.  This approach
4524can be useful, for example, when a certain region of memory is faster
4525than another.
4526
4527Overlays are described using the @code{OVERLAY} command.  The
4528@code{OVERLAY} command is used within a @code{SECTIONS} command, like an
4529output section description.  The full syntax of the @code{OVERLAY}
4530command is as follows:
4531@smallexample
4532@group
4533OVERLAY [@var{start}] : [NOCROSSREFS] [AT ( @var{ldaddr} )]
4534  @{
4535    @var{secname1}
4536      @{
4537        @var{output-section-command}
4538        @var{output-section-command}
4539        @dots{}
4540      @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
4541    @var{secname2}
4542      @{
4543        @var{output-section-command}
4544        @var{output-section-command}
4545        @dots{}
4546      @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
4547    @dots{}
4548  @} [>@var{region}] [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
4549@end group
4550@end smallexample
4551
4552Everything is optional except @code{OVERLAY} (a keyword), and each
4553section must have a name (@var{secname1} and @var{secname2} above).  The
4554section definitions within the @code{OVERLAY} construct are identical to
4555those within the general @code{SECTIONS} contruct (@pxref{SECTIONS}),
4556except that no addresses and no memory regions may be defined for
4557sections within an @code{OVERLAY}.
4558
4559The sections are all defined with the same starting address.  The load
4560addresses of the sections are arranged such that they are consecutive in
4561memory starting at the load address used for the @code{OVERLAY} as a
4562whole (as with normal section definitions, the load address is optional,
4563and defaults to the start address; the start address is also optional,
4564and defaults to the current value of the location counter).
4565
4566If the @code{NOCROSSREFS} keyword is used, and there any references
4567among the sections, the linker will report an error.  Since the sections
4568all run at the same address, it normally does not make sense for one
4569section to refer directly to another.  @xref{Miscellaneous Commands,
4570NOCROSSREFS}.
4571
4572For each section within the @code{OVERLAY}, the linker automatically
4573provides two symbols.  The symbol @code{__load_start_@var{secname}} is
4574defined as the starting load address of the section.  The symbol
4575@code{__load_stop_@var{secname}} is defined as the final load address of
4576the section.  Any characters within @var{secname} which are not legal
4577within C identifiers are removed.  C (or assembler) code may use these
4578symbols to move the overlaid sections around as necessary.
4579
4580At the end of the overlay, the value of the location counter is set to
4581the start address of the overlay plus the size of the largest section.
4582
4583Here is an example.  Remember that this would appear inside a
4584@code{SECTIONS} construct.
4585@smallexample
4586@group
4587  OVERLAY 0x1000 : AT (0x4000)
4588   @{
4589     .text0 @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
4590     .text1 @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
4591   @}
4592@end group
4593@end smallexample
4594@noindent
4595This will define both @samp{.text0} and @samp{.text1} to start at
4596address 0x1000.  @samp{.text0} will be loaded at address 0x4000, and
4597@samp{.text1} will be loaded immediately after @samp{.text0}.  The
4598following symbols will be defined if referenced: @code{__load_start_text0},
4599@code{__load_stop_text0}, @code{__load_start_text1},
4600@code{__load_stop_text1}.
4601
4602C code to copy overlay @code{.text1} into the overlay area might look
4603like the following.
4604
4605@smallexample
4606@group
4607  extern char __load_start_text1, __load_stop_text1;
4608  memcpy ((char *) 0x1000, &__load_start_text1,
4609          &__load_stop_text1 - &__load_start_text1);
4610@end group
4611@end smallexample
4612
4613Note that the @code{OVERLAY} command is just syntactic sugar, since
4614everything it does can be done using the more basic commands.  The above
4615example could have been written identically as follows.
4616
4617@smallexample
4618@group
4619  .text0 0x1000 : AT (0x4000) @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
4620  PROVIDE (__load_start_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0));
4621  PROVIDE (__load_stop_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0) + SIZEOF (.text0));
4622  .text1 0x1000 : AT (0x4000 + SIZEOF (.text0)) @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
4623  PROVIDE (__load_start_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1));
4624  PROVIDE (__load_stop_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1) + SIZEOF (.text1));
4625  . = 0x1000 + MAX (SIZEOF (.text0), SIZEOF (.text1));
4626@end group
4627@end smallexample
4628
4629@node MEMORY
4630@section MEMORY Command
4631@kindex MEMORY
4632@cindex memory regions
4633@cindex regions of memory
4634@cindex allocating memory
4635@cindex discontinuous memory
4636The linker's default configuration permits allocation of all available
4637memory.  You can override this by using the @code{MEMORY} command.
4638
4639The @code{MEMORY} command describes the location and size of blocks of
4640memory in the target.  You can use it to describe which memory regions
4641may be used by the linker, and which memory regions it must avoid.  You
4642can then assign sections to particular memory regions.  The linker will
4643set section addresses based on the memory regions, and will warn about
4644regions that become too full.  The linker will not shuffle sections
4645around to fit into the available regions.
4646
4647A linker script may contain at most one use of the @code{MEMORY}
4648command.  However, you can define as many blocks of memory within it as
4649you wish.  The syntax is:
4650@smallexample
4651@group
4652MEMORY
4653  @{
4654    @var{name} [(@var{attr})] : ORIGIN = @var{origin}, LENGTH = @var{len}
4655    @dots{}
4656  @}
4657@end group
4658@end smallexample
4659
4660The @var{name} is a name used in the linker script to refer to the
4661region.  The region name has no meaning outside of the linker script.
4662Region names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
4663with symbol names, file names, or section names.  Each memory region
4664must have a distinct name within the @code{MEMORY} command.  However you can
4665add later alias names to existing memory regions with the @ref{REGION_ALIAS}
4666command.  
4667
4668@cindex memory region attributes
4669The @var{attr} string is an optional list of attributes that specify
4670whether to use a particular memory region for an input section which is
4671not explicitly mapped in the linker script.  As described in
4672@ref{SECTIONS}, if you do not specify an output section for some input
4673section, the linker will create an output section with the same name as
4674the input section.  If you define region attributes, the linker will use
4675them to select the memory region for the output section that it creates.
4676
4677The @var{attr} string must consist only of the following characters:
4678@table @samp
4679@item R
4680Read-only section
4681@item W
4682Read/write section
4683@item X
4684Executable section
4685@item A
4686Allocatable section
4687@item I
4688Initialized section
4689@item L
4690Same as @samp{I}
4691@item !
4692Invert the sense of any of the attributes that follow
4693@end table
4694
4695If a unmapped section matches any of the listed attributes other than
4696@samp{!}, it will be placed in the memory region.  The @samp{!}
4697attribute reverses this test, so that an unmapped section will be placed
4698in the memory region only if it does not match any of the listed
4699attributes.
4700
4701@kindex ORIGIN =
4702@kindex o =
4703@kindex org =
4704The @var{origin} is an numerical expression for the start address of
4705the memory region.  The expression must evaluate to a constant and it
4706cannot involve any symbols.  The keyword @code{ORIGIN} may be
4707abbreviated to @code{org} or @code{o} (but not, for example,
4708@code{ORG}).
4709
4710@kindex LENGTH =
4711@kindex len =
4712@kindex l =
4713The @var{len} is an expression for the size in bytes of the memory
4714region.  As with the @var{origin} expression, the expression must
4715be numerical only and must evaluate to a constant.  The keyword
4716@code{LENGTH} may be abbreviated to @code{len} or @code{l}.
4717
4718In the following example, we specify that there are two memory regions
4719available for allocation: one starting at @samp{0} for 256 kilobytes,
4720and the other starting at @samp{0x40000000} for four megabytes.  The
4721linker will place into the @samp{rom} memory region every section which
4722is not explicitly mapped into a memory region, and is either read-only
4723or executable.  The linker will place other sections which are not
4724explicitly mapped into a memory region into the @samp{ram} memory
4725region.
4726
4727@smallexample
4728@group
4729MEMORY
4730  @{
4731    rom (rx)  : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 256K
4732    ram (!rx) : org = 0x40000000, l = 4M
4733  @}
4734@end group
4735@end smallexample
4736
4737Once you define a memory region, you can direct the linker to place
4738specific output sections into that memory region by using the
4739@samp{>@var{region}} output section attribute.  For example, if you have
4740a memory region named @samp{mem}, you would use @samp{>mem} in the
4741output section definition.  @xref{Output Section Region}.  If no address
4742was specified for the output section, the linker will set the address to
4743the next available address within the memory region.  If the combined
4744output sections directed to a memory region are too large for the
4745region, the linker will issue an error message.
4746
4747It is possible to access the origin and length of a memory in an
4748expression via the @code{ORIGIN(@var{memory})} and
4749@code{LENGTH(@var{memory})} functions:
4750
4751@smallexample
4752@group
4753  _fstack = ORIGIN(ram) + LENGTH(ram) - 4;
4754@end group
4755@end smallexample
4756
4757@node PHDRS
4758@section PHDRS Command
4759@kindex PHDRS
4760@cindex program headers
4761@cindex ELF program headers
4762@cindex program segments
4763@cindex segments, ELF
4764The ELF object file format uses @dfn{program headers}, also knows as
4765@dfn{segments}.  The program headers describe how the program should be
4766loaded into memory.  You can print them out by using the @code{objdump}
4767program with the @samp{-p} option.
4768
4769When you run an ELF program on a native ELF system, the system loader
4770reads the program headers in order to figure out how to load the
4771program.  This will only work if the program headers are set correctly.
4772This manual does not describe the details of how the system loader
4773interprets program headers; for more information, see the ELF ABI.
4774
4775The linker will create reasonable program headers by default.  However,
4776in some cases, you may need to specify the program headers more
4777precisely.  You may use the @code{PHDRS} command for this purpose.  When
4778the linker sees the @code{PHDRS} command in the linker script, it will
4779not create any program headers other than the ones specified.
4780
4781The linker only pays attention to the @code{PHDRS} command when
4782generating an ELF output file.  In other cases, the linker will simply
4783ignore @code{PHDRS}.
4784
4785This is the syntax of the @code{PHDRS} command.  The words @code{PHDRS},
4786@code{FILEHDR}, @code{AT}, and @code{FLAGS} are keywords.
4787
4788@smallexample
4789@group
4790PHDRS
4791@{
4792  @var{name} @var{type} [ FILEHDR ] [ PHDRS ] [ AT ( @var{address} ) ]
4793        [ FLAGS ( @var{flags} ) ] ;
4794@}
4795@end group
4796@end smallexample
4797
4798The @var{name} is used only for reference in the @code{SECTIONS} command
4799of the linker script.  It is not put into the output file.  Program
4800header names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
4801with symbol names, file names, or section names.  Each program header
4802must have a distinct name.  The headers are processed in order and it
4803is usual for them to map to sections in ascending load address order.
4804
4805Certain program header types describe segments of memory which the
4806system loader will load from the file.  In the linker script, you
4807specify the contents of these segments by placing allocatable output
4808sections in the segments.  You use the @samp{:@var{phdr}} output section
4809attribute to place a section in a particular segment.  @xref{Output
4810Section Phdr}.
4811
4812It is normal to put certain sections in more than one segment.  This
4813merely implies that one segment of memory contains another.  You may
4814repeat @samp{:@var{phdr}}, using it once for each segment which should
4815contain the section.
4816
4817If you place a section in one or more segments using @samp{:@var{phdr}},
4818then the linker will place all subsequent allocatable sections which do
4819not specify @samp{:@var{phdr}} in the same segments.  This is for
4820convenience, since generally a whole set of contiguous sections will be
4821placed in a single segment.  You can use @code{:NONE} to override the
4822default segment and tell the linker to not put the section in any
4823segment at all.
4824
4825@kindex FILEHDR
4826@kindex PHDRS
4827You may use the @code{FILEHDR} and @code{PHDRS} keywords after
4828the program header type to further describe the contents of the segment.
4829The @code{FILEHDR} keyword means that the segment should include the ELF
4830file header.  The @code{PHDRS} keyword means that the segment should
4831include the ELF program headers themselves.  If applied to a loadable
4832segment (@code{PT_LOAD}), all prior loadable segments must have one of
4833these keywords.
4834
4835The @var{type} may be one of the following.  The numbers indicate the
4836value of the keyword.
4837
4838@table @asis
4839@item @code{PT_NULL} (0)
4840Indicates an unused program header.
4841
4842@item @code{PT_LOAD} (1)
4843Indicates that this program header describes a segment to be loaded from
4844the file.
4845
4846@item @code{PT_DYNAMIC} (2)
4847Indicates a segment where dynamic linking information can be found.
4848
4849@item @code{PT_INTERP} (3)
4850Indicates a segment where the name of the program interpreter may be
4851found.
4852
4853@item @code{PT_NOTE} (4)
4854Indicates a segment holding note information.
4855
4856@item @code{PT_SHLIB} (5)
4857A reserved program header type, defined but not specified by the ELF
4858ABI.
4859
4860@item @code{PT_PHDR} (6)
4861Indicates a segment where the program headers may be found.
4862
4863@item @var{expression}
4864An expression giving the numeric type of the program header.  This may
4865be used for types not defined above.
4866@end table
4867
4868You can specify that a segment should be loaded at a particular address
4869in memory by using an @code{AT} expression.  This is identical to the
4870@code{AT} command used as an output section attribute (@pxref{Output
4871Section LMA}).  The @code{AT} command for a program header overrides the
4872output section attribute.
4873
4874The linker will normally set the segment flags based on the sections
4875which comprise the segment.  You may use the @code{FLAGS} keyword to
4876explicitly specify the segment flags.  The value of @var{flags} must be
4877an integer.  It is used to set the @code{p_flags} field of the program
4878header.
4879
4880Here is an example of @code{PHDRS}.  This shows a typical set of program
4881headers used on a native ELF system.
4882
4883@example
4884@group
4885PHDRS
4886@{
4887  headers PT_PHDR PHDRS ;
4888  interp PT_INTERP ;
4889  text PT_LOAD FILEHDR PHDRS ;
4890  data PT_LOAD ;
4891  dynamic PT_DYNAMIC ;
4892@}
4893
4894SECTIONS
4895@{
4896  . = SIZEOF_HEADERS;
4897  .interp : @{ *(.interp) @} :text :interp
4898  .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text
4899  .rodata : @{ *(.rodata) @} /* defaults to :text */
4900  @dots{}
4901  . = . + 0x1000; /* move to a new page in memory */
4902  .data : @{ *(.data) @} :data
4903  .dynamic : @{ *(.dynamic) @} :data :dynamic
4904  @dots{}
4905@}
4906@end group
4907@end example
4908
4909@node VERSION
4910@section VERSION Command
4911@kindex VERSION @{script text@}
4912@cindex symbol versions
4913@cindex version script
4914@cindex versions of symbols
4915The linker supports symbol versions when using ELF.  Symbol versions are
4916only useful when using shared libraries.  The dynamic linker can use
4917symbol versions to select a specific version of a function when it runs
4918a program that may have been linked against an earlier version of the
4919shared library.
4920
4921You can include a version script directly in the main linker script, or
4922you can supply the version script as an implicit linker script.  You can
4923also use the @samp{--version-script} linker option.
4924
4925The syntax of the @code{VERSION} command is simply
4926@smallexample
4927VERSION @{ version-script-commands @}
4928@end smallexample
4929
4930The format of the version script commands is identical to that used by
4931Sun's linker in Solaris 2.5.  The version script defines a tree of
4932version nodes.  You specify the node names and interdependencies in the
4933version script.  You can specify which symbols are bound to which
4934version nodes, and you can reduce a specified set of symbols to local
4935scope so that they are not globally visible outside of the shared
4936library.
4937
4938The easiest way to demonstrate the version script language is with a few
4939examples.
4940
4941@smallexample
4942VERS_1.1 @{
4943	 global:
4944		 foo1;
4945	 local:
4946		 old*;
4947		 original*;
4948		 new*;
4949@};
4950
4951VERS_1.2 @{
4952		 foo2;
4953@} VERS_1.1;
4954
4955VERS_2.0 @{
4956		 bar1; bar2;
4957	 extern "C++" @{
4958		 ns::*;
4959		 "f(int, double)";
4960	 @};
4961@} VERS_1.2;
4962@end smallexample
4963
4964This example version script defines three version nodes.  The first
4965version node defined is @samp{VERS_1.1}; it has no other dependencies.
4966The script binds the symbol @samp{foo1} to @samp{VERS_1.1}.  It reduces
4967a number of symbols to local scope so that they are not visible outside
4968of the shared library; this is done using wildcard patterns, so that any
4969symbol whose name begins with @samp{old}, @samp{original}, or @samp{new}
4970is matched.  The wildcard patterns available are the same as those used
4971in the shell when matching filenames (also known as ``globbing'').
4972However, if you specify the symbol name inside double quotes, then the
4973name is treated as literal, rather than as a glob pattern.
4974
4975Next, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_1.2}.  This node
4976depends upon @samp{VERS_1.1}.  The script binds the symbol @samp{foo2}
4977to the version node @samp{VERS_1.2}.
4978
4979Finally, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_2.0}.  This node
4980depends upon @samp{VERS_1.2}.  The scripts binds the symbols @samp{bar1}
4981and @samp{bar2} are bound to the version node @samp{VERS_2.0}.
4982
4983When the linker finds a symbol defined in a library which is not
4984specifically bound to a version node, it will effectively bind it to an
4985unspecified base version of the library.  You can bind all otherwise
4986unspecified symbols to a given version node by using @samp{global: *;}
4987somewhere in the version script.  Note that it's slightly crazy to use
4988wildcards in a global spec except on the last version node.  Global
4989wildcards elsewhere run the risk of accidentally adding symbols to the
4990set exported for an old version.  That's wrong since older versions
4991ought to have a fixed set of symbols.
4992
4993The names of the version nodes have no specific meaning other than what
4994they might suggest to the person reading them.  The @samp{2.0} version
4995could just as well have appeared in between @samp{1.1} and @samp{1.2}.
4996However, this would be a confusing way to write a version script.
4997
4998Node name can be omitted, provided it is the only version node
4999in the version script.  Such version script doesn't assign any versions to
5000symbols, only selects which symbols will be globally visible out and which
5001won't.
5002
5003@smallexample
5004@{ global: foo; bar; local: *; @};
5005@end smallexample
5006
5007When you link an application against a shared library that has versioned
5008symbols, the application itself knows which version of each symbol it
5009requires, and it also knows which version nodes it needs from each
5010shared library it is linked against.  Thus at runtime, the dynamic
5011loader can make a quick check to make sure that the libraries you have
5012linked against do in fact supply all of the version nodes that the
5013application will need to resolve all of the dynamic symbols.  In this
5014way it is possible for the dynamic linker to know with certainty that
5015all external symbols that it needs will be resolvable without having to
5016search for each symbol reference.
5017
5018The symbol versioning is in effect a much more sophisticated way of
5019doing minor version checking that SunOS does.  The fundamental problem
5020that is being addressed here is that typically references to external
5021functions are bound on an as-needed basis, and are not all bound when
5022the application starts up.  If a shared library is out of date, a
5023required interface may be missing; when the application tries to use
5024that interface, it may suddenly and unexpectedly fail.  With symbol
5025versioning, the user will get a warning when they start their program if
5026the libraries being used with the application are too old.
5027
5028There are several GNU extensions to Sun's versioning approach.  The
5029first of these is the ability to bind a symbol to a version node in the
5030source file where the symbol is defined instead of in the versioning
5031script.  This was done mainly to reduce the burden on the library
5032maintainer.  You can do this by putting something like:
5033@smallexample
5034__asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5035@end smallexample
5036@noindent
5037in the C source file.  This renames the function @samp{original_foo} to
5038be an alias for @samp{foo} bound to the version node @samp{VERS_1.1}.
5039The @samp{local:} directive can be used to prevent the symbol
5040@samp{original_foo} from being exported. A @samp{.symver} directive
5041takes precedence over a version script.
5042
5043The second GNU extension is to allow multiple versions of the same
5044function to appear in a given shared library.  In this way you can make
5045an incompatible change to an interface without increasing the major
5046version number of the shared library, while still allowing applications
5047linked against the old interface to continue to function.
5048
5049To do this, you must use multiple @samp{.symver} directives in the
5050source file.  Here is an example:
5051
5052@smallexample
5053__asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@");
5054__asm__(".symver old_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5055__asm__(".symver old_foo1,foo@@VERS_1.2");
5056__asm__(".symver new_foo,foo@@@@VERS_2.0");
5057@end smallexample
5058
5059In this example, @samp{foo@@} represents the symbol @samp{foo} bound to the
5060unspecified base version of the symbol.  The source file that contains this
5061example would define 4 C functions: @samp{original_foo}, @samp{old_foo},
5062@samp{old_foo1}, and @samp{new_foo}.
5063
5064When you have multiple definitions of a given symbol, there needs to be
5065some way to specify a default version to which external references to
5066this symbol will be bound.  You can do this with the
5067@samp{foo@@@@VERS_2.0} type of @samp{.symver} directive.  You can only
5068declare one version of a symbol as the default in this manner; otherwise
5069you would effectively have multiple definitions of the same symbol.
5070
5071If you wish to bind a reference to a specific version of the symbol
5072within the shared library, you can use the aliases of convenience
5073(i.e., @samp{old_foo}), or you can use the @samp{.symver} directive to
5074specifically bind to an external version of the function in question.
5075
5076You can also specify the language in the version script:
5077
5078@smallexample
5079VERSION extern "lang" @{ version-script-commands @}
5080@end smallexample
5081
5082The supported @samp{lang}s are @samp{C}, @samp{C++}, and @samp{Java}.
5083The linker will iterate over the list of symbols at the link time and
5084demangle them according to @samp{lang} before matching them to the
5085patterns specified in @samp{version-script-commands}.  The default
5086@samp{lang} is @samp{C}.
5087
5088Demangled names may contains spaces and other special characters.  As
5089described above, you can use a glob pattern to match demangled names,
5090or you can use a double-quoted string to match the string exactly.  In
5091the latter case, be aware that minor differences (such as differing
5092whitespace) between the version script and the demangler output will
5093cause a mismatch.  As the exact string generated by the demangler
5094might change in the future, even if the mangled name does not, you
5095should check that all of your version directives are behaving as you
5096expect when you upgrade.
5097
5098@node Expressions
5099@section Expressions in Linker Scripts
5100@cindex expressions
5101@cindex arithmetic
5102The syntax for expressions in the linker script language is identical to
5103that of C expressions.  All expressions are evaluated as integers.  All
5104expressions are evaluated in the same size, which is 32 bits if both the
5105host and target are 32 bits, and is otherwise 64 bits.
5106
5107You can use and set symbol values in expressions.
5108
5109The linker defines several special purpose builtin functions for use in
5110expressions.
5111
5112@menu
5113* Constants::			Constants
5114* Symbolic Constants::          Symbolic constants
5115* Symbols::			Symbol Names
5116* Orphan Sections::		Orphan Sections
5117* Location Counter::		The Location Counter
5118* Operators::			Operators
5119* Evaluation::			Evaluation
5120* Expression Section::		The Section of an Expression
5121* Builtin Functions::		Builtin Functions
5122@end menu
5123
5124@node Constants
5125@subsection Constants
5126@cindex integer notation
5127@cindex constants in linker scripts
5128All constants are integers.
5129
5130As in C, the linker considers an integer beginning with @samp{0} to be
5131octal, and an integer beginning with @samp{0x} or @samp{0X} to be
5132hexadecimal.  Alternatively the linker accepts suffixes of @samp{h} or
5133@samp{H} for hexadeciaml, @samp{o} or @samp{O} for octal, @samp{b} or
5134@samp{B} for binary and @samp{d} or @samp{D} for decimal.  Any integer
5135value without a prefix or a suffix is considered to be decimal.
5136
5137@cindex scaled integers
5138@cindex K and M integer suffixes
5139@cindex M and K integer suffixes
5140@cindex suffixes for integers
5141@cindex integer suffixes
5142In addition, you can use the suffixes @code{K} and @code{M} to scale a
5143constant by
5144@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5145@ifnottex
5146@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5147@code{1024} or @code{1024*1024}
5148@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5149@end ifnottex
5150@tex
5151${\rm 1024}$ or ${\rm 1024}^2$
5152@end tex
5153@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5154respectively.  For example, the following
5155all refer to the same quantity:
5156
5157@smallexample
5158_fourk_1 = 4K;
5159_fourk_2 = 4096;
5160_fourk_3 = 0x1000;
5161_fourk_4 = 10000o;
5162@end smallexample
5163
5164Note - the @code{K} and @code{M} suffixes cannot be used in
5165conjunction with the base suffixes mentioned above.
5166
5167@node Symbolic Constants
5168@subsection Symbolic Constants
5169@cindex symbolic constants
5170@kindex CONSTANT
5171It is possible to refer to target specific constants via the use of
5172the @code{CONSTANT(@var{name})} operator, where @var{name} is one of:
5173
5174@table @code
5175@item MAXPAGESIZE
5176@kindex MAXPAGESIZE
5177The target's maximum page size.
5178
5179@item COMMONPAGESIZE
5180@kindex COMMONPAGESIZE
5181The target's default page size.
5182@end table
5183
5184So for example:
5185
5186@smallexample
5187  .text ALIGN (CONSTANT (MAXPAGESIZE)) : @{ *(.text) @} 
5188@end smallexample
5189
5190will create a text section aligned to the largest page boundary
5191supported by the target.
5192
5193@node Symbols
5194@subsection Symbol Names
5195@cindex symbol names
5196@cindex names
5197@cindex quoted symbol names
5198@kindex "
5199Unless quoted, symbol names start with a letter, underscore, or period
5200and may include letters, digits, underscores, periods, and hyphens.
5201Unquoted symbol names must not conflict with any keywords.  You can
5202specify a symbol which contains odd characters or has the same name as a
5203keyword by surrounding the symbol name in double quotes:
5204@smallexample
5205"SECTION" = 9;
5206"with a space" = "also with a space" + 10;
5207@end smallexample
5208
5209Since symbols can contain many non-alphabetic characters, it is safest
5210to delimit symbols with spaces.  For example, @samp{A-B} is one symbol,
5211whereas @samp{A - B} is an expression involving subtraction.
5212
5213@node Orphan Sections
5214@subsection Orphan Sections
5215@cindex orphan
5216Orphan sections are sections present in the input files which
5217are not explicitly placed into the output file by the linker
5218script.  The linker will still copy these sections into the
5219output file, but it has to guess as to where they should be
5220placed.  The linker uses a simple heuristic to do this.  It
5221attempts to place orphan sections after non-orphan sections of the
5222same attribute, such as code vs data, loadable vs non-loadable, etc.
5223If there is not enough room to do this then it places
5224at the end of the file.
5225
5226For ELF targets, the attribute of the section includes section type as
5227well as section flag.
5228
5229If an orphaned section's name is representable as a C identifier then
5230the linker will automatically @pxref{PROVIDE} two symbols:
5231__start_SECNAME and __end_SECNAME, where SECNAME is the name of the
5232section.  These indicate the start address and end address of the
5233orphaned section respectively.  Note: most section names are not
5234representable as C identifiers because they contain a @samp{.}
5235character.
5236
5237@node Location Counter
5238@subsection The Location Counter
5239@kindex .
5240@cindex dot
5241@cindex location counter
5242@cindex current output location
5243The special linker variable @dfn{dot} @samp{.} always contains the
5244current output location counter.  Since the @code{.} always refers to a
5245location in an output section, it may only appear in an expression
5246within a @code{SECTIONS} command.  The @code{.} symbol may appear
5247anywhere that an ordinary symbol is allowed in an expression.
5248
5249@cindex holes
5250Assigning a value to @code{.} will cause the location counter to be
5251moved.  This may be used to create holes in the output section.  The
5252location counter may not be moved backwards inside an output section,
5253and may not be moved backwards outside of an output section if so
5254doing creates areas with overlapping LMAs.
5255
5256@smallexample
5257SECTIONS
5258@{
5259  output :
5260    @{
5261      file1(.text)
5262      . = . + 1000;
5263      file2(.text)
5264      . += 1000;
5265      file3(.text)
5266    @} = 0x12345678;
5267@}
5268@end smallexample
5269@noindent
5270In the previous example, the @samp{.text} section from @file{file1} is
5271located at the beginning of the output section @samp{output}.  It is
5272followed by a 1000 byte gap.  Then the @samp{.text} section from
5273@file{file2} appears, also with a 1000 byte gap following before the
5274@samp{.text} section from @file{file3}.  The notation @samp{= 0x12345678}
5275specifies what data to write in the gaps (@pxref{Output Section Fill}).
5276
5277@cindex dot inside sections
5278Note: @code{.} actually refers to the byte offset from the start of the
5279current containing object.  Normally this is the @code{SECTIONS}
5280statement, whose start address is 0, hence @code{.} can be used as an
5281absolute address.  If @code{.} is used inside a section description
5282however, it refers to the byte offset from the start of that section,
5283not an absolute address.  Thus in a script like this:
5284
5285@smallexample
5286SECTIONS
5287@{
5288    . = 0x100
5289    .text: @{
5290      *(.text)
5291      . = 0x200
5292    @}
5293    . = 0x500
5294    .data: @{
5295      *(.data)
5296      . += 0x600
5297    @}
5298@}
5299@end smallexample
5300
5301The @samp{.text} section will be assigned a starting address of 0x100
5302and a size of exactly 0x200 bytes, even if there is not enough data in
5303the @samp{.text} input sections to fill this area.  (If there is too
5304much data, an error will be produced because this would be an attempt to
5305move @code{.} backwards).  The @samp{.data} section will start at 0x500
5306and it will have an extra 0x600 bytes worth of space after the end of
5307the values from the @samp{.data} input sections and before the end of
5308the @samp{.data} output section itself.
5309
5310@cindex dot outside sections
5311Setting symbols to the value of the location counter outside of an
5312output section statement can result in unexpected values if the linker
5313needs to place orphan sections.  For example, given the following:
5314
5315@smallexample
5316SECTIONS
5317@{
5318    start_of_text = . ;
5319    .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5320    end_of_text = . ;
5321
5322    start_of_data = . ;
5323    .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5324    end_of_data = . ;
5325@}
5326@end smallexample
5327
5328If the linker needs to place some input section, e.g. @code{.rodata},
5329not mentioned in the script, it might choose to place that section
5330between @code{.text} and @code{.data}.  You might think the linker
5331should place @code{.rodata} on the blank line in the above script, but
5332blank lines are of no particular significance to the linker.  As well,
5333the linker doesn't associate the above symbol names with their
5334sections.  Instead, it assumes that all assignments or other
5335statements belong to the previous output section, except for the
5336special case of an assignment to @code{.}.  I.e., the linker will
5337place the orphan @code{.rodata} section as if the script was written
5338as follows:
5339
5340@smallexample
5341SECTIONS
5342@{
5343    start_of_text = . ;
5344    .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5345    end_of_text = . ;
5346
5347    start_of_data = . ;
5348    .rodata: @{ *(.rodata) @}
5349    .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5350    end_of_data = . ;
5351@}
5352@end smallexample
5353
5354This may or may not be the script author's intention for the value of
5355@code{start_of_data}.  One way to influence the orphan section
5356placement is to assign the location counter to itself, as the linker
5357assumes that an assignment to @code{.} is setting the start address of
5358a following output section and thus should be grouped with that
5359section.  So you could write:
5360
5361@smallexample
5362SECTIONS
5363@{
5364    start_of_text = . ;
5365    .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5366    end_of_text = . ;
5367
5368    . = . ;
5369    start_of_data = . ;
5370    .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5371    end_of_data = . ;
5372@}
5373@end smallexample
5374
5375Now, the orphan @code{.rodata} section will be placed between
5376@code{end_of_text} and @code{start_of_data}.
5377
5378@need 2000
5379@node Operators
5380@subsection Operators
5381@cindex operators for arithmetic
5382@cindex arithmetic operators
5383@cindex precedence in expressions
5384The linker recognizes the standard C set of arithmetic operators, with
5385the standard bindings and precedence levels:
5386@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5387@ifnottex
5388@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5389@smallexample
5390precedence      associativity   Operators                Notes
5391(highest)
53921               left            !  -  ~                  (1)
53932               left            *  /  %
53943               left            +  -
53954               left            >>  <<
53965               left            ==  !=  >  <  <=  >=
53976               left            &
53987               left            |
53998               left            &&
54009               left            ||
540110              right           ? :
540211              right           &=  +=  -=  *=  /=       (2)
5403(lowest)
5404@end smallexample
5405Notes:
5406(1) Prefix operators
5407(2) @xref{Assignments}.
5408@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5409@end ifnottex
5410@tex
5411\vskip \baselineskip
5412%"lispnarrowing" is the extra indent used generally for smallexample
5413\hskip\lispnarrowing\vbox{\offinterlineskip
5414\hrule
5415\halign
5416{\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ {\tt #}\ \hfil&\vrule#\cr
5417height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5418&Precedence&&  Associativity  &&{\rm Operators}&\cr
5419height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5420\noalign{\hrule}
5421height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5422&highest&&&&&\cr
5423% '176 is tilde, '~' in tt font
5424&1&&left&&\qquad-          \char'176\      !\qquad\dag&\cr
5425&2&&left&&*          /        \%&\cr
5426&3&&left&&+          -&\cr
5427&4&&left&&>>         <<&\cr
5428&5&&left&&==         !=       >      <      <=      >=&\cr
5429&6&&left&&\&&\cr
5430&7&&left&&|&\cr
5431&8&&left&&{\&\&}&\cr
5432&9&&left&&||&\cr
5433&10&&right&&?        :&\cr
5434&11&&right&&\qquad\&=      +=       -=     *=     /=\qquad\ddag&\cr
5435&lowest&&&&&\cr
5436height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr}
5437\hrule}
5438@end tex
5439@iftex
5440{
5441@obeylines@parskip=0pt@parindent=0pt
5442@dag@quad Prefix operators.
5443@ddag@quad @xref{Assignments}.
5444}
5445@end iftex
5446@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5447
5448@node Evaluation
5449@subsection Evaluation
5450@cindex lazy evaluation
5451@cindex expression evaluation order
5452The linker evaluates expressions lazily.  It only computes the value of
5453an expression when absolutely necessary.
5454
5455The linker needs some information, such as the value of the start
5456address of the first section, and the origins and lengths of memory
5457regions, in order to do any linking at all.  These values are computed
5458as soon as possible when the linker reads in the linker script.
5459
5460However, other values (such as symbol values) are not known or needed
5461until after storage allocation.  Such values are evaluated later, when
5462other information (such as the sizes of output sections) is available
5463for use in the symbol assignment expression.
5464
5465The sizes of sections cannot be known until after allocation, so
5466assignments dependent upon these are not performed until after
5467allocation.
5468
5469Some expressions, such as those depending upon the location counter
5470@samp{.}, must be evaluated during section allocation.
5471
5472If the result of an expression is required, but the value is not
5473available, then an error results.  For example, a script like the
5474following
5475@smallexample
5476@group
5477SECTIONS
5478  @{
5479    .text 9+this_isnt_constant :
5480      @{ *(.text) @}
5481  @}
5482@end group
5483@end smallexample
5484@noindent
5485will cause the error message @samp{non constant expression for initial
5486address}.
5487
5488@node Expression Section
5489@subsection The Section of an Expression
5490@cindex expression sections
5491@cindex absolute expressions
5492@cindex relative expressions
5493@cindex absolute and relocatable symbols
5494@cindex relocatable and absolute symbols
5495@cindex symbols, relocatable and absolute
5496Addresses and symbols may be section relative, or absolute.  A section
5497relative symbol is relocatable.  If you request relocatable output
5498using the @samp{-r} option, a further link operation may change the
5499value of a section relative symbol.  On the other hand, an absolute
5500symbol will retain the same value throughout any further link
5501operations.
5502
5503Some terms in linker expressions are addresses.  This is true of
5504section relative symbols and for builtin functions that return an
5505address, such as @code{ADDR}, @code{LOADADDR}, @code{ORIGIN} and
5506@code{SEGMENT_START}.  Other terms are simply numbers, or are builtin
5507functions that return a non-address value, such as @code{LENGTH}.
5508One complication is that unless you set @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")}
5509(@pxref{Miscellaneous Commands}), numbers and absolute symbols are treated
5510differently depending on their location, for compatibility with older
5511versions of @code{ld}.  Expressions appearing outside an output
5512section definition treat all numbers as absolute addresses.
5513Expressions appearing inside an output section definition treat
5514absolute symbols as numbers.  If @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")} is
5515given, then absolute symbols and numbers are simply treated as numbers
5516everywhere.
5517
5518In the following simple example,
5519
5520@smallexample
5521@group
5522SECTIONS
5523  @{
5524    . = 0x100;
5525    __executable_start = 0x100;
5526    .data :
5527    @{
5528      . = 0x10;
5529      __data_start = 0x10;
5530      *(.data)
5531    @}
5532    @dots{}
5533  @}
5534@end group
5535@end smallexample
5536
5537both @code{.} and @code{__executable_start} are set to the absolute
5538address 0x100 in the first two assignments, then both @code{.} and
5539@code{__data_start} are set to 0x10 relative to the @code{.data}
5540section in the second two assignments.
5541
5542For expressions involving numbers, relative addresses and absolute
5543addresses, ld follows these rules to evaluate terms:
5544
5545@itemize @bullet
5546@item
5547Unary operations on a relative address, and binary operations on two
5548relative addresses in the same section or between one relative address
5549and a number, apply the operator to the offset part of the address(es).
5550@item
5551Unary operations on an absolute address, and binary operations on one
5552or more absolute addresses or on two relative addresses not in the
5553same section, first convert any non-absolute term to an absolute
5554address before applying the operator.
5555@end itemize
5556
5557The result section of each sub-expression is as follows:
5558
5559@itemize @bullet
5560@item
5561An operation involving only numbers results in a number.
5562@item
5563The result of comparisons, @samp{&&} and @samp{||} is also a number.
5564@item
5565The result of other binary arithmetic and logical operations on two
5566relative addresses in the same section or two absolute addresess
5567(after above conversions) is also a number.
5568@item
5569The result of other operations on relative addresses or one
5570relative address and a number, is a relative address in the same
5571section as the relative operand(s).
5572@item
5573The result of other operations on absolute addresses (after above
5574conversions) is an absolute address.
5575@end itemize
5576
5577You can use the builtin function @code{ABSOLUTE} to force an expression
5578to be absolute when it would otherwise be relative.  For example, to
5579create an absolute symbol set to the address of the end of the output
5580section @samp{.data}:
5581@smallexample
5582SECTIONS
5583  @{
5584    .data : @{ *(.data) _edata = ABSOLUTE(.); @}
5585  @}
5586@end smallexample
5587@noindent
5588If @samp{ABSOLUTE} were not used, @samp{_edata} would be relative to the
5589@samp{.data} section.
5590
5591Using @code{LOADADDR} also forces an expression absolute, since this
5592particular builtin function returns an absolute address.
5593
5594@node Builtin Functions
5595@subsection Builtin Functions
5596@cindex functions in expressions
5597The linker script language includes a number of builtin functions for
5598use in linker script expressions.
5599
5600@table @code
5601@item ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
5602@kindex ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
5603@cindex expression, absolute
5604Return the absolute (non-relocatable, as opposed to non-negative) value
5605of the expression @var{exp}.  Primarily useful to assign an absolute
5606value to a symbol within a section definition, where symbol values are
5607normally section relative.  @xref{Expression Section}.
5608
5609@item ADDR(@var{section})
5610@kindex ADDR(@var{section})
5611@cindex section address in expression
5612Return the address (VMA) of the named @var{section}.  Your
5613script must previously have defined the location of that section.  In
5614the following example, @code{start_of_output_1}, @code{symbol_1} and
5615@code{symbol_2} are assigned equivalent values, except that
5616@code{symbol_1} will be relative to the @code{.output1} section while
5617the other two will be absolute:
5618@smallexample
5619@group
5620SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
5621  .output1 :
5622    @{
5623    start_of_output_1 = ABSOLUTE(.);
5624    @dots{}
5625    @}
5626  .output :
5627    @{
5628    symbol_1 = ADDR(.output1);
5629    symbol_2 = start_of_output_1;
5630    @}
5631@dots{} @}
5632@end group
5633@end smallexample
5634
5635@item ALIGN(@var{align})
5636@itemx ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
5637@kindex ALIGN(@var{align})
5638@kindex ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
5639@cindex round up location counter
5640@cindex align location counter
5641@cindex round up expression
5642@cindex align expression
5643Return the location counter (@code{.}) or arbitrary expression aligned
5644to the next @var{align} boundary.  The single operand @code{ALIGN}
5645doesn't change the value of the location counter---it just does
5646arithmetic on it.  The two operand @code{ALIGN} allows an arbitrary
5647expression to be aligned upwards (@code{ALIGN(@var{align})} is
5648equivalent to @code{ALIGN(., @var{align})}).
5649
5650Here is an example which aligns the output @code{.data} section to the
5651next @code{0x2000} byte boundary after the preceding section and sets a
5652variable within the section to the next @code{0x8000} boundary after the
5653input sections:
5654@smallexample
5655@group
5656SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
5657  .data ALIGN(0x2000): @{
5658    *(.data)
5659    variable = ALIGN(0x8000);
5660  @}
5661@dots{} @}
5662@end group
5663@end smallexample
5664@noindent
5665The first use of @code{ALIGN} in this example specifies the location of
5666a section because it is used as the optional @var{address} attribute of
5667a section definition (@pxref{Output Section Address}).  The second use
5668of @code{ALIGN} is used to defines the value of a symbol.
5669
5670The builtin function @code{NEXT} is closely related to @code{ALIGN}.
5671
5672@item ALIGNOF(@var{section})
5673@kindex ALIGNOF(@var{section})
5674@cindex section alignment
5675Return the alignment in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
5676been allocated.  If the section has not been allocated when this is
5677evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
5678the alignment of the @code{.output} section is stored as the first
5679value in that section.
5680@smallexample
5681@group
5682SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
5683  .output @{
5684    LONG (ALIGNOF (.output))
5685    @dots{}
5686    @}
5687@dots{} @}
5688@end group
5689@end smallexample
5690
5691@item BLOCK(@var{exp})
5692@kindex BLOCK(@var{exp})
5693This is a synonym for @code{ALIGN}, for compatibility with older linker
5694scripts.  It is most often seen when setting the address of an output
5695section.
5696
5697@item DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
5698@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
5699This is equivalent to either
5700@smallexample
5701(ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - 1)))
5702@end smallexample
5703or
5704@smallexample
5705(ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - @var{commonpagesize})))
5706@end smallexample
5707@noindent
5708depending on whether the latter uses fewer @var{commonpagesize} sized pages
5709for the data segment (area between the result of this expression and
5710@code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}) than the former or not.
5711If the latter form is used, it means @var{commonpagesize} bytes of runtime
5712memory will be saved at the expense of up to @var{commonpagesize} wasted
5713bytes in the on-disk file.
5714
5715This expression can only be used directly in @code{SECTIONS} commands, not in
5716any output section descriptions and only once in the linker script.
5717@var{commonpagesize} should be less or equal to @var{maxpagesize} and should
5718be the system page size the object wants to be optimized for (while still
5719working on system page sizes up to @var{maxpagesize}).
5720
5721@noindent
5722Example:
5723@smallexample
5724  . = DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(0x10000, 0x2000);
5725@end smallexample
5726
5727@item DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
5728@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
5729This defines the end of data segment for @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN}
5730evaluation purposes.
5731
5732@smallexample
5733  . = DATA_SEGMENT_END(.);
5734@end smallexample
5735
5736@item DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
5737@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
5738This defines the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment when
5739@samp{-z relro} option is used.  Second argument is returned.
5740When @samp{-z relro} option is not present, @code{DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END}
5741does nothing, otherwise @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} is padded so that
5742@var{exp} + @var{offset} is aligned to the most commonly used page
5743boundary for particular target.  If present in the linker script,
5744it must always come in between @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} and
5745@code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}.
5746
5747@smallexample
5748  . = DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(24, .);
5749@end smallexample
5750
5751@item DEFINED(@var{symbol})
5752@kindex DEFINED(@var{symbol})
5753@cindex symbol defaults
5754Return 1 if @var{symbol} is in the linker global symbol table and is
5755defined before the statement using DEFINED in the script, otherwise
5756return 0.  You can use this function to provide
5757default values for symbols.  For example, the following script fragment
5758shows how to set a global symbol @samp{begin} to the first location in
5759the @samp{.text} section---but if a symbol called @samp{begin} already
5760existed, its value is preserved:
5761
5762@smallexample
5763@group
5764SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
5765  .text : @{
5766    begin = DEFINED(begin) ? begin : . ;
5767    @dots{}
5768  @}
5769  @dots{}
5770@}
5771@end group
5772@end smallexample
5773
5774@item LENGTH(@var{memory})
5775@kindex LENGTH(@var{memory})
5776Return the length of the memory region named @var{memory}.
5777
5778@item LOADADDR(@var{section})
5779@kindex LOADADDR(@var{section})
5780@cindex section load address in expression
5781Return the absolute LMA of the named @var{section}.  (@pxref{Output
5782Section LMA}).
5783
5784@kindex MAX
5785@item MAX(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
5786Returns the maximum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
5787
5788@kindex MIN
5789@item MIN(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
5790Returns the minimum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
5791
5792@item NEXT(@var{exp})
5793@kindex NEXT(@var{exp})
5794@cindex unallocated address, next
5795Return the next unallocated address that is a multiple of @var{exp}.
5796This function is closely related to @code{ALIGN(@var{exp})}; unless you
5797use the @code{MEMORY} command to define discontinuous memory for the
5798output file, the two functions are equivalent.
5799
5800@item ORIGIN(@var{memory})
5801@kindex ORIGIN(@var{memory})
5802Return the origin of the memory region named @var{memory}.
5803
5804@item SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
5805@kindex SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
5806Return the base address of the named @var{segment}.  If an explicit
5807value has been given for this segment (with a command-line @samp{-T}
5808option) that value will be returned; otherwise the value will be
5809@var{default}.  At present, the @samp{-T} command-line option can only
5810be used to set the base address for the ``text'', ``data'', and
5811``bss'' sections, but you can use @code{SEGMENT_START} with any segment
5812name.
5813
5814@item SIZEOF(@var{section})
5815@kindex SIZEOF(@var{section})
5816@cindex section size
5817Return the size in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
5818been allocated.  If the section has not been allocated when this is
5819evaluated, the linker will report an error.  In the following example,
5820@code{symbol_1} and @code{symbol_2} are assigned identical values:
5821@smallexample
5822@group
5823SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
5824  .output @{
5825    .start = . ;
5826    @dots{}
5827    .end = . ;
5828    @}
5829  symbol_1 = .end - .start ;
5830  symbol_2 = SIZEOF(.output);
5831@dots{} @}
5832@end group
5833@end smallexample
5834
5835@item SIZEOF_HEADERS
5836@itemx sizeof_headers
5837@kindex SIZEOF_HEADERS
5838@cindex header size
5839Return the size in bytes of the output file's headers.  This is
5840information which appears at the start of the output file.  You can use
5841this number when setting the start address of the first section, if you
5842choose, to facilitate paging.
5843
5844@cindex not enough room for program headers
5845@cindex program headers, not enough room
5846When producing an ELF output file, if the linker script uses the
5847@code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} builtin function, the linker must compute the
5848number of program headers before it has determined all the section
5849addresses and sizes.  If the linker later discovers that it needs
5850additional program headers, it will report an error @samp{not enough
5851room for program headers}.  To avoid this error, you must avoid using
5852the @code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} function, or you must rework your linker
5853script to avoid forcing the linker to use additional program headers, or
5854you must define the program headers yourself using the @code{PHDRS}
5855command (@pxref{PHDRS}).
5856@end table
5857
5858@node Implicit Linker Scripts
5859@section Implicit Linker Scripts
5860@cindex implicit linker scripts
5861If you specify a linker input file which the linker can not recognize as
5862an object file or an archive file, it will try to read the file as a
5863linker script.  If the file can not be parsed as a linker script, the
5864linker will report an error.
5865
5866An implicit linker script will not replace the default linker script.
5867
5868Typically an implicit linker script would contain only symbol
5869assignments, or the @code{INPUT}, @code{GROUP}, or @code{VERSION}
5870commands.
5871
5872Any input files read because of an implicit linker script will be read
5873at the position in the command line where the implicit linker script was
5874read.  This can affect archive searching.
5875
5876@ifset GENERIC
5877@node Machine Dependent
5878@chapter Machine Dependent Features
5879
5880@cindex machine dependencies
5881@command{ld} has additional features on some platforms; the following
5882sections describe them.  Machines where @command{ld} has no additional
5883functionality are not listed.
5884
5885@menu
5886@ifset H8300
5887* H8/300::                      @command{ld} and the H8/300
5888@end ifset
5889@ifset I960
5890* i960::                        @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family
5891@end ifset
5892@ifset ARM
5893* ARM::				@command{ld} and the ARM family
5894@end ifset
5895@ifset HPPA
5896* HPPA ELF32::                  @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF
5897@end ifset
5898@ifset M68K
5899* M68K::			@command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
5900@end ifset
5901@ifset MMIX
5902* MMIX::			@command{ld} and MMIX
5903@end ifset
5904@ifset MSP430
5905* MSP430::			@command{ld} and MSP430
5906@end ifset
5907@ifset M68HC11
5908* M68HC11/68HC12::		@code{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
5909@end ifset
5910@ifset POWERPC
5911* PowerPC ELF32::		@command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
5912@end ifset
5913@ifset POWERPC64
5914* PowerPC64 ELF64::		@command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
5915@end ifset
5916@ifset SPU
5917* SPU ELF::			@command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
5918@end ifset
5919@ifset TICOFF
5920* TI COFF::                     @command{ld} and TI COFF
5921@end ifset
5922@ifset WIN32
5923* WIN32::                       @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
5924@end ifset
5925@ifset XTENSA
5926* Xtensa::                      @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors
5927@end ifset
5928@end menu
5929@end ifset
5930
5931@ifset H8300
5932@ifclear GENERIC
5933@raisesections
5934@end ifclear
5935
5936@node H8/300
5937@section @command{ld} and the H8/300
5938
5939@cindex H8/300 support
5940For the H8/300, @command{ld} can perform these global optimizations when
5941you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
5942
5943@table @emph
5944@cindex relaxing on H8/300
5945@item relaxing address modes
5946@command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
5947targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
5948program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
5949respectively.
5950
5951@cindex synthesizing on H8/300
5952@item synthesizing instructions
5953@c FIXME: specifically mov.b, or any mov instructions really?
5954@command{ld} finds all @code{mov.b} instructions which use the
5955sixteen-bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
5956page of memory, and changes them to use the eight-bit address form.
5957(That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:16} into
5958@samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in the
5959top page of memory).
5960
5961@item bit manipulation instructions
5962@command{ld} finds all bit manipulation instructions like @code{band, bclr,
5963biand, bild, bior, bist, bixor, bld, bnot, bor, bset, bst, btst, bxor}
5964which use 32 bit and 16 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
5965page of memory, and changes them to use the 8 bit address form.
5966(That is: the linker turns @samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:32} into
5967@samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
5968the top page of memory).
5969
5970@item system control instructions
5971@command{ld} finds all @code{ldc.w, stc.w} instructions which use the
597232 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top page of memory, and
5973changes them to use 16 bit address form.
5974(That is: the linker turns @samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:32,ccr} into
5975@samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:16,ccr} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
5976the top page of memory).
5977@end table
5978
5979@ifclear GENERIC
5980@lowersections
5981@end ifclear
5982@end ifset
5983
5984@ifclear GENERIC
5985@ifset Renesas
5986@c This stuff is pointless to say unless you're especially concerned
5987@c with Renesas chips; don't enable it for generic case, please.
5988@node Renesas
5989@chapter @command{ld} and Other Renesas Chips
5990
5991@command{ld} also supports the Renesas (formerly Hitachi) H8/300H,
5992H8/500, and SH chips.  No special features, commands, or command-line
5993options are required for these chips.
5994@end ifset
5995@end ifclear
5996
5997@ifset I960
5998@ifclear GENERIC
5999@raisesections
6000@end ifclear
6001
6002@node i960
6003@section @command{ld} and the Intel 960 Family
6004
6005@cindex i960 support
6006
6007You can use the @samp{-A@var{architecture}} command line option to
6008specify one of the two-letter names identifying members of the 960
6009family; the option specifies the desired output target, and warns of any
6010incompatible instructions in the input files.  It also modifies the
6011linker's search strategy for archive libraries, to support the use of
6012libraries specific to each particular architecture, by including in the
6013search loop names suffixed with the string identifying the architecture.
6014
6015For example, if your @command{ld} command line included @w{@samp{-ACA}} as
6016well as @w{@samp{-ltry}}, the linker would look (in its built-in search
6017paths, and in any paths you specify with @samp{-L}) for a library with
6018the names
6019
6020@smallexample
6021@group
6022try
6023libtry.a
6024tryca
6025libtryca.a
6026@end group
6027@end smallexample
6028
6029@noindent
6030The first two possibilities would be considered in any event; the last
6031two are due to the use of @w{@samp{-ACA}}.
6032
6033You can meaningfully use @samp{-A} more than once on a command line, since
6034the 960 architecture family allows combination of target architectures; each
6035use will add another pair of name variants to search for when @w{@samp{-l}}
6036specifies a library.
6037
6038@cindex @option{--relax} on i960
6039@cindex relaxing on i960
6040@command{ld} supports the @samp{--relax} option for the i960 family.  If
6041you specify @samp{--relax}, @command{ld} finds all @code{balx} and
6042@code{calx} instructions whose targets are within 24 bits, and turns
6043them into 24-bit program-counter relative @code{bal} and @code{cal}
6044instructions, respectively.  @command{ld} also turns @code{cal}
6045instructions into @code{bal} instructions when it determines that the
6046target subroutine is a leaf routine (that is, the target subroutine does
6047not itself call any subroutines).
6048
6049@cindex Cortex-A8 erratum workaround
6050@kindex --fix-cortex-a8
6051@kindex --no-fix-cortex-a8
6052The @samp{--fix-cortex-a8} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum in certain Cortex-A8 processors.  The workaround is enabled by default if you are targeting the ARM v7-A architecture profile.  It can be enabled otherwise by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a8}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a8}.
6053
6054The erratum only affects Thumb-2 code.  Please contact ARM for further details.
6055
6056@kindex --merge-exidx-entries
6057@kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
6058The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent exidx entries in debuginfo.
6059
6060@ifclear GENERIC
6061@lowersections
6062@end ifclear
6063@end ifset
6064
6065@ifset ARM
6066@ifclear GENERIC
6067@raisesections
6068@end ifclear
6069
6070@ifset M68HC11
6071@ifclear GENERIC
6072@raisesections
6073@end ifclear
6074
6075@node M68HC11/68HC12
6076@section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6077
6078@cindex M68HC11 and 68HC12 support
6079
6080@subsection Linker Relaxation
6081
6082For the Motorola 68HC11, @command{ld} can perform these global
6083optimizations when you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6084
6085@table @emph
6086@cindex relaxing on M68HC11
6087@item relaxing address modes
6088@command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
6089targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6090program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6091respectively.
6092
6093@command{ld} also looks at all 16-bit extended addressing modes and
6094transforms them in a direct addressing mode when the address is in
6095page 0 (between 0 and 0x0ff).
6096
6097@item relaxing gcc instruction group
6098When @command{gcc} is called with @option{-mrelax}, it can emit group
6099of instructions that the linker can optimize to use a 68HC11 direct
6100addressing mode. These instructions consists of @code{bclr} or
6101@code{bset} instructions.
6102
6103@end table
6104
6105@subsection Trampoline Generation
6106
6107@cindex trampoline generation on M68HC11
6108@cindex trampoline generation on M68HC12
6109For 68HC11 and 68HC12, @command{ld} can generate trampoline code to
6110call a far function using a normal @code{jsr} instruction. The linker
6111will also change the relocation to some far function to use the
6112trampoline address instead of the function address. This is typically the
6113case when a pointer to a function is taken. The pointer will in fact
6114point to the function trampoline.
6115
6116@ifclear GENERIC
6117@lowersections
6118@end ifclear
6119@end ifset
6120
6121@node ARM
6122@section @command{ld} and the ARM family
6123
6124@cindex ARM interworking support
6125@kindex --support-old-code
6126For the ARM, @command{ld} will generate code stubs to allow functions calls
6127between ARM and Thumb code.  These stubs only work with code that has
6128been compiled and assembled with the @samp{-mthumb-interwork} command
6129line option.  If it is necessary to link with old ARM object files or
6130libraries, which have not been compiled with the -mthumb-interwork
6131option then the @samp{--support-old-code} command line switch should be
6132given to the linker.  This will make it generate larger stub functions
6133which will work with non-interworking aware ARM code.  Note, however,
6134the linker does not support generating stubs for function calls to
6135non-interworking aware Thumb code.
6136
6137@cindex thumb entry point
6138@cindex entry point, thumb
6139@kindex --thumb-entry=@var{entry}
6140The @samp{--thumb-entry} switch is a duplicate of the generic
6141@samp{--entry} switch, in that it sets the program's starting address.
6142But it also sets the bottom bit of the address, so that it can be
6143branched to using a BX instruction, and the program will start
6144executing in Thumb mode straight away.
6145
6146@cindex PE import table prefixing
6147@kindex --use-nul-prefixed-import-tables
6148The @samp{--use-nul-prefixed-import-tables} switch is specifying, that
6149the import tables idata4 and idata5 have to be generated with a zero
6150elememt prefix for import libraries. This is the old style to generate
6151import tables. By default this option is turned off.
6152
6153@cindex BE8
6154@kindex --be8
6155The @samp{--be8} switch instructs @command{ld} to generate BE8 format
6156executables.  This option is only valid when linking big-endian objects.
6157The resulting image will contain big-endian data and little-endian code.
6158
6159@cindex TARGET1
6160@kindex --target1-rel
6161@kindex --target1-abs
6162The @samp{R_ARM_TARGET1} relocation is typically used for entries in the
6163@samp{.init_array} section.  It is interpreted as either @samp{R_ARM_REL32}
6164or @samp{R_ARM_ABS32}, depending on the target.  The @samp{--target1-rel}
6165and @samp{--target1-abs} switches override the default.
6166
6167@cindex TARGET2
6168@kindex --target2=@var{type}
6169The @samp{--target2=type} switch overrides the default definition of the
6170@samp{R_ARM_TARGET2} relocation.  Valid values for @samp{type}, their
6171meanings, and target defaults are as follows:
6172@table @samp
6173@item rel
6174@samp{R_ARM_REL32} (arm*-*-elf, arm*-*-eabi)
6175@item abs
6176@samp{R_ARM_ABS32} (arm*-*-symbianelf)
6177@item got-rel
6178@samp{R_ARM_GOT_PREL} (arm*-*-linux, arm*-*-*bsd)
6179@end table
6180
6181@cindex FIX_V4BX
6182@kindex --fix-v4bx
6183The @samp{R_ARM_V4BX} relocation (defined by the ARM AAELF
6184specification) enables objects compiled for the ARMv4 architecture to be
6185interworking-safe when linked with other objects compiled for ARMv4t, but
6186also allows pure ARMv4 binaries to be built from the same ARMv4 objects.
6187
6188In the latter case, the switch @option{--fix-v4bx} must be passed to the
6189linker, which causes v4t @code{BX rM} instructions to be rewritten as
6190@code{MOV PC,rM}, since v4 processors do not have a @code{BX} instruction.
6191
6192In the former case, the switch should not be used, and @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6193relocations are ignored.
6194
6195@cindex FIX_V4BX_INTERWORKING
6196@kindex --fix-v4bx-interworking
6197Replace @code{BX rM} instructions identified by @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6198relocations with a branch to the following veneer:
6199
6200@smallexample
6201TST rM, #1
6202MOVEQ PC, rM
6203BX Rn
6204@end smallexample
6205
6206This allows generation of libraries/applications that work on ARMv4 cores
6207and are still interworking safe.  Note that the above veneer clobbers the
6208condition flags, so may cause incorrect progrm behavior in rare cases.
6209
6210@cindex USE_BLX
6211@kindex --use-blx
6212The @samp{--use-blx} switch enables the linker to use ARM/Thumb
6213BLX instructions (available on ARMv5t and above) in various
6214situations. Currently it is used to perform calls via the PLT from Thumb
6215code using BLX rather than using BX and a mode-switching stub before
6216each PLT entry. This should lead to such calls executing slightly faster.
6217
6218This option is enabled implicitly for SymbianOS, so there is no need to
6219specify it if you are using that target.
6220
6221@cindex VFP11_DENORM_FIX
6222@kindex --vfp11-denorm-fix
6223The @samp{--vfp11-denorm-fix} switch enables a link-time workaround for a
6224bug in certain VFP11 coprocessor hardware, which sometimes allows
6225instructions with denorm operands (which must be handled by support code)
6226to have those operands overwritten by subsequent instructions before
6227the support code can read the intended values.
6228
6229The bug may be avoided in scalar mode if you allow at least one
6230intervening instruction between a VFP11 instruction which uses a register
6231and another instruction which writes to the same register, or at least two
6232intervening instructions if vector mode is in use. The bug only affects
6233full-compliance floating-point mode: you do not need this workaround if
6234you are using "runfast" mode. Please contact ARM for further details.
6235
6236If you know you are using buggy VFP11 hardware, you can
6237enable this workaround by specifying the linker option
6238@samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=scalar} if you are using the VFP11 scalar
6239mode only, or @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=vector} if you are using
6240vector mode (the latter also works for scalar code). The default is
6241@samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=none}.
6242
6243If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
6244potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
6245such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists of the
6246first instruction of the sequence and a branch back to the subsequent
6247instruction. The original instruction is then replaced with a branch to
6248the veneer. The extra cycles required to call and return from the veneer
6249are sufficient to avoid the erratum in both the scalar and vector cases.
6250
6251@cindex NO_ENUM_SIZE_WARNING
6252@kindex --no-enum-size-warning
6253The @option{--no-enum-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
6254warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
6255enumeration size attributes.  For example, with this switch enabled,
6256linking of an object file using 32-bit enumeration values with another
6257using enumeration values fitted into the smallest possible space will
6258not be diagnosed.
6259
6260@cindex NO_WCHAR_SIZE_WARNING
6261@kindex --no-wchar-size-warning
6262The @option{--no-wchar-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
6263warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
6264@code{wchar_t} size attributes.  For example, with this switch enabled,
6265linking of an object file using 32-bit @code{wchar_t} values with another
6266using 16-bit @code{wchar_t} values will not be diagnosed.
6267
6268@cindex PIC_VENEER
6269@kindex --pic-veneer
6270The @samp{--pic-veneer} switch makes the linker use PIC sequences for
6271ARM/Thumb interworking veneers, even if the rest of the binary
6272is not PIC.  This avoids problems on uClinux targets where
6273@samp{--emit-relocs} is used to generate relocatable binaries.
6274
6275@cindex STUB_GROUP_SIZE
6276@kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
6277The linker will automatically generate and insert small sequences of
6278code into a linked ARM ELF executable whenever an attempt is made to
6279perform a function call to a symbol that is too far away.  The
6280placement of these sequences of instructions - called stubs - is
6281controlled by the command line option @option{--stub-group-size=N}.
6282The placement is important because a poor choice can create a need for
6283duplicate stubs, increasing the code sizw.  The linker will try to
6284group stubs together in order to reduce interruptions to the flow of
6285code, but it needs guidance as to how big these groups should be and
6286where they should be placed.
6287
6288The value of @samp{N}, the parameter to the
6289@option{--stub-group-size=} option controls where the stub groups are
6290placed.  If it is negative then all stubs are placed after the first
6291branch that needs them.  If it is positive then the stubs can be
6292placed either before or after the branches that need them.  If the
6293value of @samp{N} is 1 (either +1 or -1) then the linker will choose
6294exactly where to place groups of stubs, using its built in heuristics.
6295A value of @samp{N} greater than 1 (or smaller than -1) tells the
6296linker that a single group of stubs can service at most @samp{N} bytes
6297from the input sections.
6298
6299The default, if @option{--stub-group-size=} is not specified, is
6300@samp{N = +1}.
6301
6302Farcalls stubs insertion is fully supported for the ARM-EABI target
6303only, because it relies on object files properties not present
6304otherwise.
6305
6306@ifclear GENERIC
6307@lowersections
6308@end ifclear
6309@end ifset
6310
6311@ifset HPPA
6312@ifclear GENERIC
6313@raisesections
6314@end ifclear
6315
6316@node HPPA ELF32
6317@section @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF Support
6318@cindex HPPA multiple sub-space stubs
6319@kindex --multi-subspace
6320When generating a shared library, @command{ld} will by default generate
6321import stubs suitable for use with a single sub-space application.
6322The @samp{--multi-subspace} switch causes @command{ld} to generate export
6323stubs, and different (larger) import stubs suitable for use with
6324multiple sub-spaces.
6325
6326@cindex HPPA stub grouping
6327@kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
6328Long branch stubs and import/export stubs are placed by @command{ld} in
6329stub sections located between groups of input sections.
6330@samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
6331sections handled by one stub section.  Since branch offsets are signed,
6332a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
6333the stub section, and one group after it.  However, when using
6334conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
6335prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
6336A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
6337branches to stubs always use a negative offset.  Two special values of
6338@samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}.  These both instruct
6339@command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
6340detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
6341positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
6342
6343Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections.  A
6344single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
6345create a larger group (of one section).  If input sections are too
6346large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
6347
6348@ifclear GENERIC
6349@lowersections
6350@end ifclear
6351@end ifset
6352
6353@ifset M68K
6354@ifclear GENERIC
6355@raisesections
6356@end ifclear
6357
6358@node M68K
6359@section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
6360
6361@cindex Motorola 68K GOT generation
6362@kindex --got=@var{type}
6363The @samp{--got=@var{type}} option lets you choose the GOT generation scheme.
6364The choices are @samp{single}, @samp{negative}, @samp{multigot} and
6365@samp{target}.  When @samp{target} is selected the linker chooses
6366the default GOT generation scheme for the current target.
6367@samp{single} tells the linker to generate a single GOT with
6368entries only at non-negative offsets.
6369@samp{negative} instructs the linker to generate a single GOT with
6370entries at both negative and positive offsets.  Not all environments
6371support such GOTs.
6372@samp{multigot} allows the linker to generate several GOTs in the
6373output file.  All GOT references from a single input object
6374file access the same GOT, but references from different input object
6375files might access different GOTs.  Not all environments support such GOTs.
6376
6377@ifclear GENERIC
6378@lowersections
6379@end ifclear
6380@end ifset
6381
6382@ifset MMIX
6383@ifclear GENERIC
6384@raisesections
6385@end ifclear
6386
6387@node MMIX
6388@section @code{ld} and MMIX
6389For MMIX, there is a choice of generating @code{ELF} object files or
6390@code{mmo} object files when linking.  The simulator @code{mmix}
6391understands the @code{mmo} format.  The binutils @code{objcopy} utility
6392can translate between the two formats.
6393
6394There is one special section, the @samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section.
6395Contents in this section is assumed to correspond to that of global
6396registers, and symbols referring to it are translated to special symbols,
6397equal to registers.  In a final link, the start address of the
6398@samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section corresponds to the first allocated
6399global register multiplied by 8.  Register @code{$255} is not included in
6400this section; it is always set to the program entry, which is at the
6401symbol @code{Main} for @code{mmo} files.
6402
6403Global symbols with the prefix @code{__.MMIX.start.}, for example
6404@code{__.MMIX.start..text} and @code{__.MMIX.start..data} are special.
6405The default linker script uses these to set the default start address
6406of a section.
6407
6408Initial and trailing multiples of zero-valued 32-bit words in a section,
6409are left out from an mmo file.
6410
6411@ifclear GENERIC
6412@lowersections
6413@end ifclear
6414@end ifset
6415
6416@ifset MSP430
6417@ifclear GENERIC
6418@raisesections
6419@end ifclear
6420
6421@node  MSP430
6422@section @code{ld} and MSP430
6423For the MSP430 it is possible to select the MPU architecture.  The flag @samp{-m [mpu type]}
6424will select an appropriate linker script for selected MPU type.  (To get a list of known MPUs
6425just pass @samp{-m help} option to the linker).
6426
6427@cindex MSP430 extra sections
6428The linker will recognize some extra sections which are MSP430 specific:
6429
6430@table @code
6431@item @samp{.vectors}
6432Defines a portion of ROM where interrupt vectors located.
6433
6434@item @samp{.bootloader}
6435Defines the bootloader portion of the ROM (if applicable).  Any code
6436in this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
6437
6438@item @samp{.infomem}
6439Defines an information memory section (if applicable).  Any code in
6440this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
6441
6442@item @samp{.infomemnobits}
6443This is the same as the @samp{.infomem} section except that any code
6444in this section will not be uploaded to the MPU.
6445
6446@item @samp{.noinit}
6447Denotes a portion of RAM located above @samp{.bss} section.
6448
6449The last two sections are used by gcc.
6450@end table
6451
6452@ifclear GENERIC
6453@lowersections
6454@end ifclear
6455@end ifset
6456
6457@ifset POWERPC
6458@ifclear GENERIC
6459@raisesections
6460@end ifclear
6461
6462@node PowerPC ELF32
6463@section @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
6464@cindex PowerPC long branches
6465@kindex --relax on PowerPC
6466Branches on PowerPC processors are limited to a signed 26-bit
6467displacement, which may result in @command{ld} giving
6468@samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
6469@samp{--relax} enables the generation of trampolines that can access
6470the entire 32-bit address space.  These trampolines are inserted at
6471section boundaries, so may not themselves be reachable if an input
6472section exceeds 33M in size.  You may combine @samp{-r} and
6473@samp{--relax} to add trampolines in a partial link.  In that case
6474both branches to undefined symbols and inter-section branches are also
6475considered potentially out of range, and trampolines inserted.
6476
6477@cindex PowerPC ELF32 options
6478@table @option
6479@cindex PowerPC PLT
6480@kindex --bss-plt
6481@item --bss-plt
6482Current PowerPC GCC accepts a @samp{-msecure-plt} option that
6483generates code capable of using a newer PLT and GOT layout that has
6484the security advantage of no executable section ever needing to be
6485writable and no writable section ever being executable.  PowerPC
6486@command{ld} will generate this layout, including stubs to access the
6487PLT, if all input files (including startup and static libraries) were
6488compiled with @samp{-msecure-plt}.  @samp{--bss-plt} forces the old
6489BSS PLT (and GOT layout) which can give slightly better performance.
6490
6491@kindex --secure-plt
6492@item --secure-plt
6493@command{ld} will use the new PLT and GOT layout if it is linking new
6494@samp{-fpic} or @samp{-fPIC} code, but does not do so automatically
6495when linking non-PIC code.  This option requests the new PLT and GOT
6496layout.  A warning will be given if some object file requires the old
6497style BSS PLT.
6498
6499@cindex PowerPC GOT
6500@kindex --sdata-got
6501@item --sdata-got
6502The new secure PLT and GOT are placed differently relative to other
6503sections compared to older BSS PLT and GOT placement.  The location of
6504@code{.plt} must change because the new secure PLT is an initialized
6505section while the old PLT is uninitialized.  The reason for the
6506@code{.got} change is more subtle:  The new placement allows
6507@code{.got} to be read-only in applications linked with
6508@samp{-z relro -z now}.  However, this placement means that
6509@code{.sdata} cannot always be used in shared libraries, because the
6510PowerPC ABI accesses @code{.sdata} in shared libraries from the GOT
6511pointer.  @samp{--sdata-got} forces the old GOT placement.  PowerPC
6512GCC doesn't use @code{.sdata} in shared libraries, so this option is
6513really only useful for other compilers that may do so.
6514
6515@cindex PowerPC stub symbols
6516@kindex --emit-stub-syms
6517@item --emit-stub-syms
6518This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
6519symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
6520
6521@cindex PowerPC TLS optimization
6522@kindex --no-tls-optimize
6523@item --no-tls-optimize
6524PowerPC @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
6525sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage.  Use this option to
6526disable the optimization.
6527@end table
6528
6529@ifclear GENERIC
6530@lowersections
6531@end ifclear
6532@end ifset
6533
6534@ifset POWERPC64
6535@ifclear GENERIC
6536@raisesections
6537@end ifclear
6538
6539@node PowerPC64 ELF64
6540@section @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
6541
6542@cindex PowerPC64 ELF64 options
6543@table @option
6544@cindex PowerPC64 stub grouping
6545@kindex --stub-group-size
6546@item --stub-group-size
6547Long branch stubs, PLT call stubs  and TOC adjusting stubs are placed
6548by @command{ld} in stub sections located between groups of input sections.
6549@samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
6550sections handled by one stub section.  Since branch offsets are signed,
6551a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
6552the stub section, and one group after it.  However, when using
6553conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
6554prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
6555A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
6556branches to stubs always use a negative offset.  Two special values of
6557@samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}.  These both instruct
6558@command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
6559detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
6560positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
6561
6562Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections.  A
6563single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
6564create a larger group (of one section).  If input sections are too
6565large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
6566
6567@cindex PowerPC64 stub symbols
6568@kindex --emit-stub-syms
6569@item --emit-stub-syms
6570This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
6571symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
6572
6573@cindex PowerPC64 dot symbols
6574@kindex --dotsyms
6575@kindex --no-dotsyms
6576@item --dotsyms, --no-dotsyms
6577These two options control how @command{ld} interprets version patterns
6578in a version script.  Older PowerPC64 compilers emitted both a
6579function descriptor symbol with the same name as the function, and a
6580code entry symbol with the name prefixed by a dot (@samp{.}).  To
6581properly version a function @samp{foo}, the version script thus needs
6582to control both @samp{foo} and @samp{.foo}.  The option
6583@samp{--dotsyms}, on by default, automatically adds the required
6584dot-prefixed patterns.  Use @samp{--no-dotsyms} to disable this
6585feature.
6586
6587@cindex PowerPC64 TLS optimization
6588@kindex --no-tls-optimize
6589@item --no-tls-optimize
6590PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
6591sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage.  Use this option to
6592disable the optimization.
6593
6594@cindex PowerPC64 OPD optimization
6595@kindex --no-opd-optimize
6596@item --no-opd-optimize
6597PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes @code{.opd} section entries
6598corresponding to deleted link-once functions, or functions removed by
6599the action of @samp{--gc-sections} or linker script @code{/DISCARD/}.
6600Use this option to disable @code{.opd} optimization.
6601
6602@cindex PowerPC64 OPD spacing
6603@kindex --non-overlapping-opd
6604@item --non-overlapping-opd
6605Some PowerPC64 compilers have an option to generate compressed
6606@code{.opd} entries spaced 16 bytes apart, overlapping the third word,
6607the static chain pointer (unused in C) with the first word of the next
6608entry.  This option expands such entries to the full 24 bytes.
6609
6610@cindex PowerPC64 TOC optimization
6611@kindex --no-toc-optimize
6612@item --no-toc-optimize
6613PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes unused @code{.toc} section
6614entries.  Such entries are detected by examining relocations that
6615reference the TOC in code sections.  A reloc in a deleted code section
6616marks a TOC word as unneeded, while a reloc in a kept code section
6617marks a TOC word as needed.  Since the TOC may reference itself, TOC
6618relocs are also examined.  TOC words marked as both needed and
6619unneeded will of course be kept.  TOC words without any referencing
6620reloc are assumed to be part of a multi-word entry, and are kept or
6621discarded as per the nearest marked preceding word.  This works
6622reliably for compiler generated code, but may be incorrect if assembly
6623code is used to insert TOC entries.  Use this option to disable the
6624optimization.
6625
6626@cindex PowerPC64 multi-TOC
6627@kindex --no-multi-toc
6628@item --no-multi-toc
6629By default, PowerPC64 GCC generates code for a TOC model where TOC
6630entries are accessed with a 16-bit offset from r2.  This limits the
6631total TOC size to 64K.  PowerPC64 @command{ld} extends this limit by
6632grouping code sections such that each group uses less than 64K for its
6633TOC entries, then inserts r2 adjusting stubs between inter-group
6634calls.  @command{ld} does not split apart input sections, so cannot
6635help if a single input file has a @code{.toc} section that exceeds
663664K, most likely from linking multiple files with @command{ld -r}.
6637Use this option to turn off this feature.
6638@end table
6639
6640@ifclear GENERIC
6641@lowersections
6642@end ifclear
6643@end ifset
6644
6645@ifset SPU
6646@ifclear GENERIC
6647@raisesections
6648@end ifclear
6649
6650@node SPU ELF
6651@section @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
6652
6653@cindex SPU ELF options
6654@table @option
6655
6656@cindex SPU plugins
6657@kindex --plugin
6658@item --plugin
6659This option marks an executable as a PIC plugin module.
6660
6661@cindex SPU overlays
6662@kindex --no-overlays
6663@item --no-overlays
6664Normally, @command{ld} recognizes calls to functions within overlay
6665regions, and redirects such calls to an overlay manager via a stub.
6666@command{ld} also provides a built-in overlay manager.  This option
6667turns off all this special overlay handling.
6668
6669@cindex SPU overlay stub symbols
6670@kindex --emit-stub-syms
6671@item --emit-stub-syms
6672This option causes @command{ld} to label overlay stubs with a local
6673symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
6674
6675@cindex SPU extra overlay stubs
6676@kindex --extra-overlay-stubs
6677@item --extra-overlay-stubs
6678This option causes @command{ld} to add overlay call stubs on all
6679function calls out of overlay regions.  Normally stubs are not added
6680on calls to non-overlay regions.
6681
6682@cindex SPU local store size
6683@kindex --local-store=lo:hi
6684@item --local-store=lo:hi
6685@command{ld} usually checks that a final executable for SPU fits in
6686the address range 0 to 256k.  This option may be used to change the
6687range.  Disable the check entirely with @option{--local-store=0:0}.
6688
6689@cindex SPU
6690@kindex --stack-analysis
6691@item --stack-analysis
6692SPU local store space is limited.  Over-allocation of stack space
6693unnecessarily limits space available for code and data, while
6694under-allocation results in runtime failures.  If given this option,
6695@command{ld} will provide an estimate of maximum stack usage.
6696@command{ld} does this by examining symbols in code sections to
6697determine the extents of functions, and looking at function prologues
6698for stack adjusting instructions.  A call-graph is created by looking
6699for relocations on branch instructions.  The graph is then searched
6700for the maximum stack usage path.  Note that this analysis does not
6701find calls made via function pointers, and does not handle recursion
6702and other cycles in the call graph.  Stack usage may be
6703under-estimated if your code makes such calls.  Also, stack usage for
6704dynamic allocation, e.g. alloca, will not be detected.  If a link map
6705is requested, detailed information about each function's stack usage
6706and calls will be given.
6707
6708@cindex SPU
6709@kindex --emit-stack-syms
6710@item --emit-stack-syms
6711This option, if given along with @option{--stack-analysis} will result
6712in @command{ld} emitting stack sizing symbols for each function.
6713These take the form @code{__stack_<function_name>} for global
6714functions, and @code{__stack_<number>_<function_name>} for static
6715functions.  @code{<number>} is the section id in hex.  The value of
6716such symbols is the stack requirement for the corresponding function.
6717The symbol size will be zero, type @code{STT_NOTYPE}, binding
6718@code{STB_LOCAL}, and section @code{SHN_ABS}.
6719@end table
6720
6721@ifclear GENERIC
6722@lowersections
6723@end ifclear
6724@end ifset
6725
6726@ifset TICOFF
6727@ifclear GENERIC
6728@raisesections
6729@end ifclear
6730
6731@node TI COFF
6732@section @command{ld}'s Support for Various TI COFF Versions
6733@cindex TI COFF versions
6734@kindex --format=@var{version}
6735The @samp{--format} switch allows selection of one of the various
6736TI COFF versions.  The latest of this writing is 2; versions 0 and 1 are
6737also supported.  The TI COFF versions also vary in header byte-order
6738format; @command{ld} will read any version or byte order, but the output
6739header format depends on the default specified by the specific target.
6740
6741@ifclear GENERIC
6742@lowersections
6743@end ifclear
6744@end ifset
6745
6746@ifset WIN32
6747@ifclear GENERIC
6748@raisesections
6749@end ifclear
6750
6751@node WIN32
6752@section @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
6753
6754This section describes some of the win32 specific @command{ld} issues.
6755See @ref{Options,,Command Line Options} for detailed description of the
6756command line options mentioned here.
6757
6758@table @emph
6759@cindex import libraries
6760@item import libraries
6761The standard Windows linker creates and uses so-called import
6762libraries, which contains information for linking to dll's.  They are
6763regular static archives and are handled as any other static
6764archive.  The cygwin and mingw ports of @command{ld} have specific
6765support for creating such libraries provided with the
6766@samp{--out-implib} command line option.
6767
6768@item   exporting DLL symbols
6769@cindex exporting DLL symbols
6770The cygwin/mingw @command{ld} has several ways to export symbols for dll's.
6771
6772@table @emph
6773@item   using auto-export functionality
6774@cindex using auto-export functionality
6775By default @command{ld} exports symbols with the auto-export functionality,
6776which is controlled by the following command line options:
6777
6778@itemize
6779@item --export-all-symbols   [This is the default]
6780@item --exclude-symbols
6781@item --exclude-libs
6782@item --exclude-modules-for-implib
6783@item --version-script
6784@end itemize
6785
6786When auto-export is in operation, @command{ld} will export all the non-local
6787(global and common) symbols it finds in a DLL, with the exception of a few
6788symbols known to belong to the system's runtime and libraries.  As it will
6789often not be desirable to export all of a DLL's symbols, which may include
6790private functions that are not part of any public interface, the command-line
6791options listed above may be used to filter symbols out from the list for 
6792exporting.  The @samp{--output-def} option can be used in order to see the
6793final list of exported symbols with all exclusions taken into effect.
6794
6795If @samp{--export-all-symbols} is not given explicitly on the
6796command line, then the default auto-export behavior will be @emph{disabled}
6797if either of the following are true:
6798
6799@itemize
6800@item A DEF file is used.
6801@item Any symbol in any object file was marked with the __declspec(dllexport) attribute.
6802@end itemize
6803
6804@item   using a DEF file
6805@cindex using a DEF file
6806Another way of exporting symbols is using a DEF file.  A DEF file is
6807an ASCII file containing definitions of symbols which should be
6808exported when a dll is created.  Usually it is named @samp{<dll
6809name>.def} and is added as any other object file to the linker's
6810command line.  The file's name must end in @samp{.def} or @samp{.DEF}.
6811
6812@example
6813gcc -o <output> <objectfiles> <dll name>.def
6814@end example
6815
6816Using a DEF file turns off the normal auto-export behavior, unless the
6817@samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
6818
6819Here is an example of a DEF file for a shared library called @samp{xyz.dll}:
6820
6821@example
6822LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x20000000
6823
6824EXPORTS
6825foo
6826bar
6827_bar = bar
6828another_foo = abc.dll.afoo
6829var1 DATA
6830doo = foo == foo2
6831eoo DATA == var1
6832@end example
6833
6834This example defines a DLL with a non-default base address and seven
6835symbols in the export table. The third exported symbol @code{_bar} is an
6836alias for the second. The fourth symbol, @code{another_foo} is resolved
6837by "forwarding" to another module and treating it as an alias for
6838@code{afoo} exported from the DLL @samp{abc.dll}. The final symbol
6839@code{var1} is declared to be a data object. The @samp{doo} symbol in
6840export library is an alias of @samp{foo}, which gets the string name
6841in export table @samp{foo2}. The @samp{eoo} symbol is an data export
6842symbol, which gets in export table the name @samp{var1}.
6843
6844The optional @code{LIBRARY <name>} command indicates the @emph{internal}
6845name of the output DLL. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix,
6846the default library suffix, @samp{.DLL} is appended.
6847
6848When the .DEF file is used to build an application, rather than a
6849library, the @code{NAME <name>} command should be used instead of
6850@code{LIBRARY}. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix, the default
6851executable suffix, @samp{.EXE} is appended.
6852
6853With either @code{LIBRARY <name>} or @code{NAME <name>} the optional
6854specification @code{BASE = <number>} may be used to specify a
6855non-default base address for the image.
6856
6857If neither @code{LIBRARY <name>} nor  @code{NAME <name>} is specified,
6858or they specify an empty string, the internal name is the same as the
6859filename specified on the command line.
6860
6861The complete specification of an export symbol is:
6862
6863@example
6864EXPORTS
6865  ( (  ( <name1> [ = <name2> ] )
6866     | ( <name1> = <module-name> . <external-name>))
6867  [ @@ <integer> ] [NONAME] [DATA] [CONSTANT] [PRIVATE] [== <name3>] ) *
6868@end example
6869
6870Declares @samp{<name1>} as an exported symbol from the DLL, or declares
6871@samp{<name1>} as an exported alias for @samp{<name2>}; or declares
6872@samp{<name1>} as a "forward" alias for the symbol
6873@samp{<external-name>} in the DLL @samp{<module-name>}.
6874Optionally, the symbol may be exported by the specified ordinal
6875@samp{<integer>} alias. The optional @samp{<name3>} is the to be used
6876string in import/export table for the symbol.
6877
6878The optional keywords that follow the declaration indicate:
6879
6880@code{NONAME}: Do not put the symbol name in the DLL's export table.  It
6881will still be exported by its ordinal alias (either the value specified
6882by the .def specification or, otherwise, the value assigned by the
6883linker). The symbol name, however, does remain visible in the import
6884library (if any), unless @code{PRIVATE} is also specified.
6885
6886@code{DATA}: The symbol is a variable or object, rather than a function.
6887The import lib will export only an indirect reference to @code{foo} as
6888the symbol @code{_imp__foo} (ie, @code{foo} must be resolved as
6889@code{*_imp__foo}).
6890
6891@code{CONSTANT}: Like @code{DATA}, but put the undecorated @code{foo} as
6892well as @code{_imp__foo} into the import library. Both refer to the
6893read-only import address table's pointer to the variable, not to the
6894variable itself. This can be dangerous. If the user code fails to add
6895the @code{dllimport} attribute and also fails to explicitly add the
6896extra indirection that the use of the attribute enforces, the
6897application will behave unexpectedly.
6898
6899@code{PRIVATE}: Put the symbol in the DLL's export table, but do not put
6900it into the static import library used to resolve imports at link time. The
6901symbol can still be imported using the @code{LoadLibrary/GetProcAddress}
6902API at runtime or by by using the GNU ld extension of linking directly to
6903the DLL without an import library.
6904
6905See ld/deffilep.y in the binutils sources for the full specification of
6906other DEF file statements
6907
6908@cindex creating a DEF file
6909While linking a shared dll, @command{ld} is able to create a DEF file
6910with the @samp{--output-def <file>} command line option.
6911
6912@item   Using decorations
6913@cindex Using decorations
6914Another way of marking symbols for export is to modify the source code
6915itself, so that when building the DLL each symbol to be exported is
6916declared as:
6917
6918@example
6919__declspec(dllexport) int a_variable
6920__declspec(dllexport) void a_function(int with_args)
6921@end example
6922
6923All such symbols will be exported from the DLL.  If, however,
6924any of the object files in the DLL contain symbols decorated in
6925this way, then the normal auto-export behavior is disabled, unless
6926the @samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
6927
6928Note that object files that wish to access these symbols must @emph{not}
6929decorate them with dllexport.  Instead, they should use dllimport,
6930instead:
6931
6932@example
6933__declspec(dllimport) int a_variable
6934__declspec(dllimport) void a_function(int with_args)
6935@end example
6936
6937This complicates the structure of library header files, because
6938when included by the library itself the header must declare the
6939variables and functions as dllexport, but when included by client
6940code the header must declare them as dllimport.  There are a number
6941of idioms that are typically used to do this; often client code can
6942omit the __declspec() declaration completely.  See
6943@samp{--enable-auto-import} and @samp{automatic data imports} for more
6944information.
6945@end table
6946
6947@cindex automatic data imports
6948@item automatic data imports
6949The standard Windows dll format supports data imports from dlls only
6950by adding special decorations (dllimport/dllexport), which let the
6951compiler produce specific assembler instructions to deal with this
6952issue.  This increases the effort necessary to port existing Un*x
6953code to these platforms, especially for large
6954c++ libraries and applications.  The auto-import feature, which was
6955initially provided by Paul Sokolovsky, allows one to omit the
6956decorations to achieve a behavior that conforms to that on POSIX/Un*x
6957platforms. This feature is enabled with the @samp{--enable-auto-import}
6958command-line option, although it is enabled by default on cygwin/mingw.
6959The @samp{--enable-auto-import} option itself now serves mainly to
6960suppress any warnings that are ordinarily emitted when linked objects
6961trigger the feature's use.
6962
6963auto-import of variables does not always work flawlessly without
6964additional assistance.  Sometimes, you will see this message
6965
6966"variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
6967documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
6968
6969The @samp{--enable-auto-import} documentation explains why this error
6970occurs, and several methods that can be used to overcome this difficulty.
6971One of these methods is the @emph{runtime pseudo-relocs} feature, described
6972below.
6973
6974@cindex runtime pseudo-relocation
6975For complex variables imported from DLLs (such as structs or classes),
6976object files typically contain a base address for the variable and an
6977offset (@emph{addend}) within the variable--to specify a particular
6978field or public member, for instance.  Unfortunately, the runtime loader used
6979in win32 environments is incapable of fixing these references at runtime
6980without the additional information supplied by dllimport/dllexport decorations.
6981The standard auto-import feature described above is unable to resolve these
6982references.
6983
6984The @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} switch allows these references to
6985be resolved without error, while leaving the task of adjusting the references
6986themselves (with their non-zero addends) to specialized code provided by the
6987runtime environment.  Recent versions of the cygwin and mingw environments and
6988compilers provide this runtime support; older versions do not.  However, the
6989support is only necessary on the developer's platform; the compiled result will
6990run without error on an older system.
6991
6992@samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is not the default; it must be explicitly
6993enabled as needed.
6994
6995@cindex direct linking to a dll
6996@item direct linking to a dll
6997The cygwin/mingw ports of @command{ld} support the direct linking,
6998including data symbols, to a dll without the usage of any import
6999libraries.  This is much faster and uses much less memory than does the
7000traditional import library method, especially when linking large
7001libraries or applications.  When @command{ld} creates an import lib, each
7002function or variable exported from the dll is stored in its own bfd, even
7003though a single bfd could contain many exports.  The overhead involved in
7004storing, loading, and processing so many bfd's is quite large, and explains the
7005tremendous time, memory, and storage needed to link against particularly
7006large or complex libraries when using import libs.
7007
7008Linking directly to a dll uses no extra command-line switches other than
7009@samp{-L} and @samp{-l}, because @command{ld} already searches for a number
7010of names to match each library.  All that is needed from the developer's
7011perspective is an understanding of this search, in order to force ld to
7012select the dll instead of an import library.
7013
7014
7015For instance, when ld is called with the argument @samp{-lxxx} it will attempt
7016to find, in the first directory of its search path,
7017
7018@example
7019libxxx.dll.a
7020xxx.dll.a
7021libxxx.a
7022xxx.lib
7023cygxxx.dll (*)
7024libxxx.dll
7025xxx.dll
7026@end example
7027
7028before moving on to the next directory in the search path.
7029
7030(*) Actually, this is not @samp{cygxxx.dll} but in fact is @samp{<prefix>xxx.dll},
7031where @samp{<prefix>} is set by the @command{ld} option
7032@samp{--dll-search-prefix=<prefix>}. In the case of cygwin, the standard gcc spec
7033file includes @samp{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}, so in effect we actually search for
7034@samp{cygxxx.dll}.
7035
7036Other win32-based unix environments, such as mingw or pw32, may use other
7037@samp{<prefix>}es, although at present only cygwin makes use of this feature.  It
7038was originally intended to help avoid name conflicts among dll's built for the
7039various win32/un*x environments, so that (for example) two versions of a zlib dll
7040could coexist on the same machine.
7041
7042The generic cygwin/mingw path layout uses a @samp{bin} directory for
7043applications and dll's and a @samp{lib} directory for the import
7044libraries (using cygwin nomenclature):
7045
7046@example
7047bin/
7048	cygxxx.dll
7049lib/
7050	libxxx.dll.a   (in case of dll's)
7051	libxxx.a       (in case of static archive)
7052@end example
7053
7054Linking directly to a dll without using the import library can be
7055done two ways:
7056
70571. Use the dll directly by adding the @samp{bin} path to the link line
7058@example
7059gcc -Wl,-verbose  -o a.exe -L../bin/ -lxxx
7060@end example
7061
7062However, as the dll's often have version numbers appended to their names
7063(@samp{cygncurses-5.dll}) this will often fail, unless one specifies
7064@samp{-L../bin -lncurses-5} to include the version.  Import libs are generally
7065not versioned, and do not have this difficulty.
7066
70672. Create a symbolic link from the dll to a file in the @samp{lib}
7068directory according to the above mentioned search pattern.  This
7069should be used to avoid unwanted changes in the tools needed for
7070making the app/dll.
7071
7072@example
7073ln -s bin/cygxxx.dll lib/[cyg|lib|]xxx.dll[.a]
7074@end example
7075
7076Then you can link without any make environment changes.
7077
7078@example
7079gcc -Wl,-verbose  -o a.exe -L../lib/ -lxxx
7080@end example
7081
7082This technique also avoids the version number problems, because the following is
7083perfectly legal
7084
7085@example
7086bin/
7087	cygxxx-5.dll
7088lib/
7089	libxxx.dll.a -> ../bin/cygxxx-5.dll
7090@end example
7091
7092Linking directly to a dll without using an import lib will work
7093even when auto-import features are exercised, and even when
7094@samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is used.
7095
7096Given the improvements in speed and memory usage, one might justifiably
7097wonder why import libraries are used at all.  There are three reasons:
7098
70991. Until recently, the link-directly-to-dll functionality did @emph{not}
7100work with auto-imported data.
7101
71022. Sometimes it is necessary to include pure static objects within the
7103import library (which otherwise contains only bfd's for indirection
7104symbols that point to the exports of a dll).  Again, the import lib
7105for the cygwin kernel makes use of this ability, and it is not
7106possible to do this without an import lib.
7107
71083. Symbol aliases can only be resolved using an import lib.  This is
7109critical when linking against OS-supplied dll's (eg, the win32 API)
7110in which symbols are usually exported as undecorated aliases of their
7111stdcall-decorated assembly names.
7112
7113So, import libs are not going away.  But the ability to replace
7114true import libs with a simple symbolic link to (or a copy of)
7115a dll, in many cases, is a useful addition to the suite of tools
7116binutils makes available to the win32 developer.  Given the
7117massive improvements in memory requirements during linking, storage
7118requirements, and linking speed, we expect that many developers
7119will soon begin to use this feature whenever possible.
7120
7121@item symbol aliasing
7122@table @emph
7123@item adding additional names
7124Sometimes, it is useful to export symbols with additional names.
7125A symbol @samp{foo} will be exported as @samp{foo}, but it can also be
7126exported as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the DEF file
7127when creating the dll.  This will affect also the optional created
7128import library.  Consider the following DEF file:
7129
7130@example
7131LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
7132
7133EXPORTS
7134foo
7135_foo = foo
7136@end example
7137
7138The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the symbol @samp{foo} to @samp{_foo}.
7139
7140Another method for creating a symbol alias is to create it in the
7141source code using the "weak" attribute:
7142
7143@example
7144void foo () @{ /* Do something.  */; @}
7145void _foo () __attribute__ ((weak, alias ("foo")));
7146@end example
7147
7148See the gcc manual for more information about attributes and weak
7149symbols.
7150
7151@item renaming symbols
7152Sometimes it is useful to rename exports.  For instance, the cygwin
7153kernel does this regularly.  A symbol @samp{_foo} can be exported as
7154@samp{foo} but not as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the
7155DEF file. (This will also affect the import library, if it is
7156created).  In the following example:
7157
7158@example
7159LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
7160
7161EXPORTS
7162_foo = foo
7163@end example
7164
7165The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the exported symbol @samp{foo} to
7166@samp{_foo}.
7167@end table
7168
7169Note: using a DEF file disables the default auto-export behavior,
7170unless the @samp{--export-all-symbols} command line option is used.
7171If, however, you are trying to rename symbols, then you should list
7172@emph{all} desired exports in the DEF file, including the symbols
7173that are not being renamed, and do @emph{not} use the
7174@samp{--export-all-symbols} option.  If you list only the
7175renamed symbols in the DEF file, and use @samp{--export-all-symbols}
7176to handle the other symbols, then the both the new names @emph{and}
7177the original names for the renamed symbols will be exported.
7178In effect, you'd be aliasing those symbols, not renaming them,
7179which is probably not what you wanted.
7180
7181@cindex weak externals
7182@item weak externals
7183The Windows object format, PE, specifies a form of weak symbols called
7184weak externals.  When a weak symbol is linked and the symbol is not
7185defined, the weak symbol becomes an alias for some other symbol.  There
7186are three variants of weak externals:
7187@itemize
7188@item Definition is searched for in objects and libraries, historically
7189called lazy externals.
7190@item Definition is searched for only in other objects, not in libraries.
7191This form is not presently implemented.
7192@item No search; the symbol is an alias.  This form is not presently
7193implemented.
7194@end itemize
7195As a GNU extension, weak symbols that do not specify an alternate symbol
7196are supported.  If the symbol is undefined when linking, the symbol
7197uses a default value.
7198
7199@cindex aligned common symbols
7200@item aligned common symbols
7201As a GNU extension to the PE file format, it is possible to specify the
7202desired alignment for a common symbol.  This information is conveyed from
7203the assembler or compiler to the linker by means of GNU-specific commands
7204carried in the object file's @samp{.drectve} section, which are recognized
7205by @command{ld} and respected when laying out the common symbols.  Native
7206tools will be able to process object files employing this GNU extension,
7207but will fail to respect the alignment instructions, and may issue noisy
7208warnings about unknown linker directives.
7209@end table
7210
7211@ifclear GENERIC
7212@lowersections
7213@end ifclear
7214@end ifset
7215
7216@ifset XTENSA
7217@ifclear GENERIC
7218@raisesections
7219@end ifclear
7220
7221@node Xtensa
7222@section @code{ld} and Xtensa Processors
7223
7224@cindex Xtensa processors
7225The default @command{ld} behavior for Xtensa processors is to interpret
7226@code{SECTIONS} commands so that lists of explicitly named sections in a
7227specification with a wildcard file will be interleaved when necessary to
7228keep literal pools within the range of PC-relative load offsets.  For
7229example, with the command:
7230
7231@smallexample
7232SECTIONS
7233@{
7234  .text : @{
7235    *(.literal .text)
7236  @}
7237@}
7238@end smallexample
7239
7240@noindent
7241@command{ld} may interleave some of the @code{.literal}
7242and @code{.text} sections from different object files to ensure that the
7243literal pools are within the range of PC-relative load offsets.  A valid
7244interleaving might place the @code{.literal} sections from an initial
7245group of files followed by the @code{.text} sections of that group of
7246files.  Then, the @code{.literal} sections from the rest of the files
7247and the @code{.text} sections from the rest of the files would follow.
7248
7249@cindex @option{--relax} on Xtensa
7250@cindex relaxing on Xtensa
7251Relaxation is enabled by default for the Xtensa version of @command{ld} and
7252provides two important link-time optimizations.  The first optimization
7253is to combine identical literal values to reduce code size.  A redundant
7254literal will be removed and all the @code{L32R} instructions that use it
7255will be changed to reference an identical literal, as long as the
7256location of the replacement literal is within the offset range of all
7257the @code{L32R} instructions.  The second optimization is to remove
7258unnecessary overhead from assembler-generated ``longcall'' sequences of
7259@code{L32R}/@code{CALLX@var{n}} when the target functions are within
7260range of direct @code{CALL@var{n}} instructions.
7261
7262For each of these cases where an indirect call sequence can be optimized
7263to a direct call, the linker will change the @code{CALLX@var{n}}
7264instruction to a @code{CALL@var{n}} instruction, remove the @code{L32R}
7265instruction, and remove the literal referenced by the @code{L32R}
7266instruction if it is not used for anything else.  Removing the
7267@code{L32R} instruction always reduces code size but can potentially
7268hurt performance by changing the alignment of subsequent branch targets.
7269By default, the linker will always preserve alignments, either by
7270switching some instructions between 24-bit encodings and the equivalent
7271density instructions or by inserting a no-op in place of the @code{L32R}
7272instruction that was removed.  If code size is more important than
7273performance, the @option{--size-opt} option can be used to prevent the
7274linker from widening density instructions or inserting no-ops, except in
7275a few cases where no-ops are required for correctness.
7276
7277The following Xtensa-specific command-line options can be used to
7278control the linker:
7279
7280@cindex Xtensa options
7281@table @option
7282@item --size-opt
7283When optimizing indirect calls to direct calls, optimize for code size
7284more than performance.  With this option, the linker will not insert
7285no-ops or widen density instructions to preserve branch target
7286alignment.  There may still be some cases where no-ops are required to
7287preserve the correctness of the code.
7288@end table
7289
7290@ifclear GENERIC
7291@lowersections
7292@end ifclear
7293@end ifset
7294
7295@ifclear SingleFormat
7296@node BFD
7297@chapter BFD
7298
7299@cindex back end
7300@cindex object file management
7301@cindex object formats available
7302@kindex objdump -i
7303The linker accesses object and archive files using the BFD libraries.
7304These libraries allow the linker to use the same routines to operate on
7305object files whatever the object file format.  A different object file
7306format can be supported simply by creating a new BFD back end and adding
7307it to the library.  To conserve runtime memory, however, the linker and
7308associated tools are usually configured to support only a subset of the
7309object file formats available.  You can use @code{objdump -i}
7310(@pxref{objdump,,objdump,binutils.info,The GNU Binary Utilities}) to
7311list all the formats available for your configuration.
7312
7313@cindex BFD requirements
7314@cindex requirements for BFD
7315As with most implementations, BFD is a compromise between
7316several conflicting requirements. The major factor influencing
7317BFD design was efficiency: any time used converting between
7318formats is time which would not have been spent had BFD not
7319been involved. This is partly offset by abstraction payback; since
7320BFD simplifies applications and back ends, more time and care
7321may be spent optimizing algorithms for a greater speed.
7322
7323One minor artifact of the BFD solution which you should bear in
7324mind is the potential for information loss.  There are two places where
7325useful information can be lost using the BFD mechanism: during
7326conversion and during output. @xref{BFD information loss}.
7327
7328@menu
7329* BFD outline::                 How it works: an outline of BFD
7330@end menu
7331
7332@node BFD outline
7333@section How It Works: An Outline of BFD
7334@cindex opening object files
7335@include bfdsumm.texi
7336@end ifclear
7337
7338@node Reporting Bugs
7339@chapter Reporting Bugs
7340@cindex bugs in @command{ld}
7341@cindex reporting bugs in @command{ld}
7342
7343Your bug reports play an essential role in making @command{ld} reliable.
7344
7345Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem, or
7346it may not.  But in any case the principal function of a bug report is
7347to help the entire community by making the next version of @command{ld}
7348work better.  Bug reports are your contribution to the maintenance of
7349@command{ld}.
7350
7351In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the
7352information that enables us to fix the bug.
7353
7354@menu
7355* Bug Criteria::                Have you found a bug?
7356* Bug Reporting::               How to report bugs
7357@end menu
7358
7359@node Bug Criteria
7360@section Have You Found a Bug?
7361@cindex bug criteria
7362
7363If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some guidelines:
7364
7365@itemize @bullet
7366@cindex fatal signal
7367@cindex linker crash
7368@cindex crash of linker
7369@item
7370If the linker gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is a
7371@command{ld} bug.  Reliable linkers never crash.
7372
7373@cindex error on valid input
7374@item
7375If @command{ld} produces an error message for valid input, that is a bug.
7376
7377@cindex invalid input
7378@item
7379If @command{ld} does not produce an error message for invalid input, that
7380may be a bug.  In the general case, the linker can not verify that
7381object files are correct.
7382
7383@item
7384If you are an experienced user of linkers, your suggestions for
7385improvement of @command{ld} are welcome in any case.
7386@end itemize
7387
7388@node Bug Reporting
7389@section How to Report Bugs
7390@cindex bug reports
7391@cindex @command{ld} bugs, reporting
7392
7393A number of companies and individuals offer support for @sc{gnu}
7394products.  If you obtained @command{ld} from a support organization, we
7395recommend you contact that organization first.
7396
7397You can find contact information for many support companies and
7398individuals in the file @file{etc/SERVICE} in the @sc{gnu} Emacs
7399distribution.
7400
7401@ifset BUGURL
7402Otherwise, send bug reports for @command{ld} to
7403@value{BUGURL}.
7404@end ifset
7405
7406The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this:
7407@strong{report all the facts}.  If you are not sure whether to state a
7408fact or leave it out, state it!
7409
7410Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the
7411problem and assume that some details do not matter.  Thus, you might
7412assume that the name of a symbol you use in an example does not
7413matter.  Well, probably it does not, but one cannot be sure.  Perhaps
7414the bug is a stray memory reference which happens to fetch from the
7415location where that name is stored in memory; perhaps, if the name
7416were different, the contents of that location would fool the linker
7417into doing the right thing despite the bug.  Play it safe and give a
7418specific, complete example.  That is the easiest thing for you to do,
7419and the most helpful.
7420
7421Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix
7422the bug if it is new to us.  Therefore, always write your bug reports
7423on the assumption that the bug has not been reported previously.
7424
7425Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, ``Does this ring a
7426bell?''  This cannot help us fix a bug, so it is basically useless.  We
7427respond by asking for enough details to enable us to investigate.
7428You might as well expedite matters by sending them to begin with.
7429
7430To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things:
7431
7432@itemize @bullet
7433@item
7434The version of @command{ld}.  @command{ld} announces it if you start it with
7435the @samp{--version} argument.
7436
7437Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in looking for
7438the bug in the current version of @command{ld}.
7439
7440@item
7441Any patches you may have applied to the @command{ld} source, including any
7442patches made to the @code{BFD} library.
7443
7444@item
7445The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name and
7446version number.
7447
7448@item
7449What compiler (and its version) was used to compile @command{ld}---e.g.
7450``@code{gcc-2.7}''.
7451
7452@item
7453The command arguments you gave the linker to link your example and
7454observe the bug.  To guarantee you will not omit something important,
7455list them all.  A copy of the Makefile (or the output from make) is
7456sufficient.
7457
7458If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess wrong
7459and then we might not encounter the bug.
7460
7461@item
7462A complete input file, or set of input files, that will reproduce the
7463bug.  It is generally most helpful to send the actual object files
7464provided that they are reasonably small.  Say no more than 10K.  For
7465bigger files you can either make them available by FTP or HTTP or else
7466state that you are willing to send the object file(s) to whomever
7467requests them.  (Note - your email will be going to a mailing list, so
7468we do not want to clog it up with large attachments).  But small
7469attachments are best.
7470
7471If the source files were assembled using @code{gas} or compiled using
7472@code{gcc}, then it may be OK to send the source files rather than the
7473object files.  In this case, be sure to say exactly what version of
7474@code{gas} or @code{gcc} was used to produce the object files.  Also say
7475how @code{gas} or @code{gcc} were configured.
7476
7477@item
7478A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is
7479incorrect.  For example, ``It gets a fatal signal.''
7480
7481Of course, if the bug is that @command{ld} gets a fatal signal, then we
7482will certainly notice it.  But if the bug is incorrect output, we might
7483not notice unless it is glaringly wrong.  You might as well not give us
7484a chance to make a mistake.
7485
7486Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should still
7487say so explicitly.  Suppose something strange is going on, such as, your
7488copy of @command{ld} is out of sync, or you have encountered a bug in the
7489C library on your system.  (This has happened!)  Your copy might crash
7490and ours would not.  If you told us to expect a crash, then when ours
7491fails to crash, we would know that the bug was not happening for us.  If
7492you had not told us to expect a crash, then we would not be able to draw
7493any conclusion from our observations.
7494
7495@item
7496If you wish to suggest changes to the @command{ld} source, send us context
7497diffs, as generated by @code{diff} with the @samp{-u}, @samp{-c}, or
7498@samp{-p} option.  Always send diffs from the old file to the new file.
7499If you even discuss something in the @command{ld} source, refer to it by
7500context, not by line number.
7501
7502The line numbers in our development sources will not match those in your
7503sources.  Your line numbers would convey no useful information to us.
7504@end itemize
7505
7506Here are some things that are not necessary:
7507
7508@itemize @bullet
7509@item
7510A description of the envelope of the bug.
7511
7512Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating
7513which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which
7514changes will not affect it.
7515
7516This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way we
7517will find the bug is by running a single example under the debugger
7518with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of examples.
7519We recommend that you save your time for something else.
7520
7521Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report @emph{instead}
7522of the original one, that is a convenience for us.  Errors in the
7523output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take
7524less time, and so on.
7525
7526However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do this,
7527report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you used.
7528
7529@item
7530A patch for the bug.
7531
7532A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one.  But do not omit
7533the necessary information, such as the test case, on the assumption that
7534a patch is all we need.  We might see problems with your patch and decide
7535to fix the problem another way, or we might not understand it at all.
7536
7537Sometimes with a program as complicated as @command{ld} it is very hard to
7538construct an example that will make the program follow a certain path
7539through the code.  If you do not send us the example, we will not be
7540able to construct one, so we will not be able to verify that the bug is
7541fixed.
7542
7543And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why your
7544patch should be an improvement, we will not install it.  A test case will
7545help us to understand.
7546
7547@item
7548A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on.
7549
7550Such guesses are usually wrong.  Even we cannot guess right about such
7551things without first using the debugger to find the facts.
7552@end itemize
7553
7554@node MRI
7555@appendix MRI Compatible Script Files
7556@cindex MRI compatibility
7557To aid users making the transition to @sc{gnu} @command{ld} from the MRI
7558linker, @command{ld} can use MRI compatible linker scripts as an
7559alternative to the more general-purpose linker scripting language
7560described in @ref{Scripts}.  MRI compatible linker scripts have a much
7561simpler command set than the scripting language otherwise used with
7562@command{ld}.  @sc{gnu} @command{ld} supports the most commonly used MRI
7563linker commands; these commands are described here.
7564
7565In general, MRI scripts aren't of much use with the @code{a.out} object
7566file format, since it only has three sections and MRI scripts lack some
7567features to make use of them.
7568
7569You can specify a file containing an MRI-compatible script using the
7570@samp{-c} command-line option.
7571
7572Each command in an MRI-compatible script occupies its own line; each
7573command line starts with the keyword that identifies the command (though
7574blank lines are also allowed for punctuation).  If a line of an
7575MRI-compatible script begins with an unrecognized keyword, @command{ld}
7576issues a warning message, but continues processing the script.
7577
7578Lines beginning with @samp{*} are comments.
7579
7580You can write these commands using all upper-case letters, or all
7581lower case; for example, @samp{chip} is the same as @samp{CHIP}.
7582The following list shows only the upper-case form of each command.
7583
7584@table @code
7585@cindex @code{ABSOLUTE} (MRI)
7586@item ABSOLUTE @var{secname}
7587@itemx ABSOLUTE @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
7588Normally, @command{ld} includes in the output file all sections from all
7589the input files.  However, in an MRI-compatible script, you can use the
7590@code{ABSOLUTE} command to restrict the sections that will be present in
7591your output program.  If the @code{ABSOLUTE} command is used at all in a
7592script, then only the sections named explicitly in @code{ABSOLUTE}
7593commands will appear in the linker output.  You can still use other
7594input sections (whatever you select on the command line, or using
7595@code{LOAD}) to resolve addresses in the output file.
7596
7597@cindex @code{ALIAS} (MRI)
7598@item ALIAS @var{out-secname}, @var{in-secname}
7599Use this command to place the data from input section @var{in-secname}
7600in a section called @var{out-secname} in the linker output file.
7601
7602@var{in-secname} may be an integer.
7603
7604@cindex @code{ALIGN} (MRI)
7605@item ALIGN @var{secname} = @var{expression}
7606Align the section called @var{secname} to @var{expression}.  The
7607@var{expression} should be a power of two.
7608
7609@cindex @code{BASE} (MRI)
7610@item BASE @var{expression}
7611Use the value of @var{expression} as the lowest address (other than
7612absolute addresses) in the output file.
7613
7614@cindex @code{CHIP} (MRI)
7615@item CHIP @var{expression}
7616@itemx CHIP @var{expression}, @var{expression}
7617This command does nothing; it is accepted only for compatibility.
7618
7619@cindex @code{END} (MRI)
7620@item END
7621This command does nothing whatever; it's only accepted for compatibility.
7622
7623@cindex @code{FORMAT} (MRI)
7624@item FORMAT @var{output-format}
7625Similar to the @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command in the more general linker
7626language, but restricted to one of these output formats:
7627
7628@enumerate
7629@item
7630S-records, if @var{output-format} is @samp{S}
7631
7632@item
7633IEEE, if @var{output-format} is @samp{IEEE}
7634
7635@item
7636COFF (the @samp{coff-m68k} variant in BFD), if @var{output-format} is
7637@samp{COFF}
7638@end enumerate
7639
7640@cindex @code{LIST} (MRI)
7641@item LIST @var{anything}@dots{}
7642Print (to the standard output file) a link map, as produced by the
7643@command{ld} command-line option @samp{-M}.
7644
7645The keyword @code{LIST} may be followed by anything on the
7646same line, with no change in its effect.
7647
7648@cindex @code{LOAD} (MRI)
7649@item LOAD @var{filename}
7650@itemx LOAD @var{filename}, @var{filename}, @dots{} @var{filename}
7651Include one or more object file @var{filename} in the link; this has the
7652same effect as specifying @var{filename} directly on the @command{ld}
7653command line.
7654
7655@cindex @code{NAME} (MRI)
7656@item NAME @var{output-name}
7657@var{output-name} is the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; the
7658MRI-compatible command @code{NAME} is equivalent to the command-line
7659option @samp{-o} or the general script language command @code{OUTPUT}.
7660
7661@cindex @code{ORDER} (MRI)
7662@item ORDER @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
7663@itemx ORDER @var{secname} @var{secname} @var{secname}
7664Normally, @command{ld} orders the sections in its output file in the
7665order in which they first appear in the input files.  In an MRI-compatible
7666script, you can override this ordering with the @code{ORDER} command.  The
7667sections you list with @code{ORDER} will appear first in your output
7668file, in the order specified.
7669
7670@cindex @code{PUBLIC} (MRI)
7671@item PUBLIC @var{name}=@var{expression}
7672@itemx PUBLIC @var{name},@var{expression}
7673@itemx PUBLIC @var{name} @var{expression}
7674Supply a value (@var{expression}) for external symbol
7675@var{name} used in the linker input files.
7676
7677@cindex @code{SECT} (MRI)
7678@item SECT @var{secname}, @var{expression}
7679@itemx SECT @var{secname}=@var{expression}
7680@itemx SECT @var{secname} @var{expression}
7681You can use any of these three forms of the @code{SECT} command to
7682specify the start address (@var{expression}) for section @var{secname}.
7683If you have more than one @code{SECT} statement for the same
7684@var{secname}, only the @emph{first} sets the start address.
7685@end table
7686
7687@node GNU Free Documentation License
7688@appendix GNU Free Documentation License
7689@include fdl.texi
7690
7691@node LD Index
7692@unnumbered LD Index
7693
7694@printindex cp
7695
7696@tex
7697% I think something like @colophon should be in texinfo.  In the
7698% meantime:
7699\long\def\colophon{\hbox to0pt{}\vfill
7700\centerline{The body of this manual is set in}
7701\centerline{\fontname\tenrm,}
7702\centerline{with headings in {\bf\fontname\tenbf}}
7703\centerline{and examples in {\tt\fontname\tentt}.}
7704\centerline{{\it\fontname\tenit\/} and}
7705\centerline{{\sl\fontname\tensl\/}}
7706\centerline{are used for emphasis.}\vfill}
7707\page\colophon
7708% Blame: doc@cygnus.com, 28mar91.
7709@end tex
7710
7711@bye
7712